Samsung Cell Phone 4g User Guide

P O R T A B L E

M O B I L E

Q U A D - B A N D

P H O N E

User Manual

Please read this manual before operating your

phone, and keep it for future reference.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Nuance , VSuite™, T9 Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its

affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.

ACCESS and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.

The Bluetooth word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered

trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.

microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.

Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.

Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube

are trademarks of Google Inc.

Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.

Open Source Software

Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General

Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open

source licenses, please visit:

http://opensource.samsung.com

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience

Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise,

intermittent sounds (like a siren or nearby conversation), and echoes, allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere.

How Does It Work?

Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system, the technology:

•

Captures, evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone, and the person you're speaking with.

Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise - so the person you're calling hears only your voice, without

disturbing background noise.

•

Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience, so you can hear clearly and don't need to speak louder to overcome

surrounding noise.

The noise suppression technology is built-in and already enabled in your new mobile phone. So it's ready to provide unsurpassed voice

clarity with every call.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability,

EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE

PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER

WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE

WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE

REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE

PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF

THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Customizing the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Section 3: Memory Card .............................................. 50

Using the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

SD card Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List ............... 53

Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Prefix Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

International Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Pause Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Wait Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Wi-Fi Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

In Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Call Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Section 5: Entering Text ............................................... 69

Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Selecting the Text Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Section 1: Getting Started ..............................................6

Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Battery Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Extending Your Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Locking and Unlocking the Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Signing into Your Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Section 2: Understanding Your Phone .........................2 0

Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Back View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Phone Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Samsung Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Configuring Samsung Keypad Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Section 6: Contacts ......................................................8 2

Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Finding a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Contact List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Contact Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Contact Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Joining Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Sending a Namecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Copying Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Synchronizing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Get Friends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

My Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Additional Contact Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

The History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

The Updates Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Section 7: Messages ..................................................1 00

Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Creating and Sending Messages via Universal Composer . . . 100

Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Viewing Newly Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Group Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Cloud Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Using Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Section 8: Multimedia ................................................ 116

Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Camera and Camcorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

The Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Using the Media Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Creating a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Transferring Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Removing Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

T-Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Section 9: Applications and Development ................ 133

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Accounts and Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Alarm & Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AllShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

AppPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Call logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Cloud Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

DriveSmart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Facebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Google Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Group Texting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Market . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Downloading a New Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Launching an Installed Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Android Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Media Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Mini Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

My Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

My Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

T-Mobile Mall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

T-Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

TeleNav GPS Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Theme Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

ThinkFree Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Tips & Tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Twitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Universal Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Qik Video Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Wi-Fi Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accounts and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Privacy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

SD Card & Phone Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Notification Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

LED settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Search Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Language & Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Voice Input and Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Accessibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Section 13: Health and Safety Information ............... 216

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . . . 220

Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

GPS & AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for

Section 10: Connections ............................................1 61

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Enable Downloading for Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Mobile AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Section 11: Time Management ..................................1 77

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Alarm and Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Setting a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Section 12: Changing Your Settings ..........................1 81

Wireless and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Drive Smart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Location and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Screen Unlock Pattern Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Android Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Theme settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Jump key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device . . . . . . 234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 1: Getting Started

This section explains how to get started with your phone by

installing and charging the battery, installing the SIM card and

optional memory card, and setting up your voice mail.

Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and may vary

from your phone, depending on the software version on your phone,

and any changes to the phone’s Settings.

Before using your phone for the first time, you’ll need to install

and charge the battery and install the SIM card. The SIM card is

loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, available

optional services, and many other features. If desired, you can

also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone.

Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the

phone unlocked, at the Home screen.

All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may

vary, depending on the software version of your phone and any

changes to the phone’s Settings.

Understanding this User Manual

Special Text

The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your

phone. A robust index for features begins on page 246.

Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the

rest. These are intended to point out important information, share

quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.

The definitions for these methods are as follows:

Also included is important safety information that you should

know before using your phone. This information is available near

the back of the guide, beginning on page 216.

•

Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or

sub-menu.

This manual provides navigation instructions according to the

default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation

may be different.

•

Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.

Important: Points out important information about the current feature

that could affect performance.

Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual

assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the

available keys.

•

Warning: Brings to your attention important information to prevent

loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Text Conventions

To remove the battery cover:

1. Locate the cover release latch and place your fingernail in

the opening and firmly “pop” the cover off the device

(similar to a soda can).

This manual provides condensed information about how to use

your phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions

are used to represent often-used steps:

2. Remove the cover.

➔

Arrows are used to represent the sequence of

selecting successive options in longer, or

repetitive, procedures.

Example: From the Home screen, press

and then tap Settings

➔

Wireless and network Bluetooth settings.”

➔

Battery Cover

The battery and microSD card are installed under the

battery cover, while the SIM card is installed below the battery.

Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure

the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down

the

key until the power-off image displays, then tap

Power off

Release Latch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To replace the battery cover:

2. Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until

the card clicks into place. Make sure that the card’s gold

contacts face into the phone and that the upper-left angled

corner of the card is positioned as shown.

1. Position the battery cover over the battery compartment

and press down until you hear a click.

2. Confirm all edges of the cover are securely attached.

SIM Card Overview

Install the SIM Card

Important!: Before removing or replacing the SIM card, make sure the

phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down

the

key until the power-off image displays, then tap

Power off

The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as

your telephone number, PIN, available optional services, and

many other features.

Important!: The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by

scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or

removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small

children.

Installing and Removing the SIM card

To install the SIM card:

1. Confirm the battery is not currently installed within the

battery compartment. The battery can block the proper

installation of the SIM card into the slot.

Remove the SIM Card

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To remove the SIM card:

2. Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it

catches with the push-click insertion. For more information

on how to use the SD card see “Using the SD Card” on

page 50.

1. If installed, remove the battery from its compartment. The

battery can block the proper removal of the SIM card from

the slot.

2. Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket.

Important!: Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the

phone’s contacts.

Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not detect it and nor

service will be available. If this happens, turn off the phone, remove

the card, and reinstall the card in the correct orientation.

Installing the microSD Memory Card

Your phone supports an optional (external) microSD™ or

microSDHC™ memory card for storage of media such as music,

pictures, video and other files. The SD card is designed for use

with this mobile phone and other devices.

Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.

The microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up

to32GB.

Note: This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card.

1. Remove the battery cover and orient the card with the gold

strips facing down.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing the microSD Memory Card

1. Remove the battery cover.

Installing Battery

2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card

should pop partially out of the slot.

3. Remove the card from the slot.

Battery

Before using your phone for the first time, install the battery and

charge it fully.

Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the

phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down

the

key until the power-off image displays, then tap

Power off

Installing the Battery

1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs

on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone,

making sure the connectors align.

ꢁ

ꢀ

2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).

Removing the Battery

Removing Battery

ᮣ

Insert your finger at the top end of the battery (3) and lift it

up and out of the battery compartment (4).

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Charging the Battery

Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger.

If the battery is not installed and the wall charger is connected, the

handset power cycles continuously preventing proper operation.

Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can

cause the phone to become damaged.

Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall

charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with

your phone. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your

local Samsung dealer for further details.

Before using your phone for the first time, you must fully charge

the battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately

4 hours.

Important!: Although the battery comes partially charged. It is recommended

you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first

time.

1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.

Charging Head

2. Slide open the Charger/Accessory jack cover (1).

3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory

jack (2).

4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet.

The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates

both its charge state and percent of charge.

USB Cable

5. Slide the cover to the power connector out to reveal the

power port.

Incorrect

Correct

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important!: If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a

touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your

finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a

metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage

the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more

information, refer to “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 237.

Low Battery Indicator

When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time

remain, a warning tone sounds and the “Low battery” message

repeats at regular intervals on the display. In this condition, your

phone conserves its remaining battery power, by dimming the

backlight.

Correct

Incorrect

When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically

turns off.

Note: This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for

connecting the charger. If the charger is incorrectly connected,

damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone’s

warranty.

Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard

The QWERTY keyboard is located below the screen.

1. Turn the phone over to where the logo appears at the

upper-right (1).

Your touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your

finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic

object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered

glass surface and void the warranty see “Health and Safety

Information” on page 216.

2. Carefully grasp the base of the phone with both hands.

6. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power

plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s

connector from the phone.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. While holding onto both sides of the phone, use your

thumbs to push against the bottom edge of the LCD (2).

After the initial push, the LCD will then quickly slide away

to reveal the QWERTY keyboard (3).

Extending Your Battery Life

Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS

functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of

helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:

•

Use the Power Control shortcut bar.

Reduce your backlight on time.

Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.

Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.

Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this

function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current

location; each query drains your battery.

•

Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging

your device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and

recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.

•

Turn off Automatic application sync.

Use the Power Control Widget to deactivate hardware functions such

as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization, or LCD brightness setting.

•

Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions

have been consuming your battery resources.

•

Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.

Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background

applications that are still running. These minimized applications can,

over time, cause your device to “slow down”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap any of the icons on the Power Control shortcut bar to

Power Control

activate/deactivate the selected feature. Options include:

Active applications, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization,

Location consent, or the LCD Brightness functionality all act to

drain your battery.

Wi-Fi Bluetooth, GPS location, Sync, and Brightness.

The Power Control shortcut bar was designed to quickly activate

(turn on), or deactivate (turn off) those functions or applications

that use the most battery power.

1. Press

to navigate to

the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty

area until the ADD TO HOME

SCREEN menu displays.

Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

GPS

Sync

Brightness

3. Tap Widgets

➔

Power

control. The Power Control

shortcut is added to the

current screen.

Note: A green bar displayed beneath the icon means the application is active

(turned on). The green bar is removed from beneath the icon when the

feature is deactivated (turned off).

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dialing Options With a SIM card installed

Switching the Phone On or Off

1. Press and hold

(Power) until the phone switches

If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on

the device,

screen.

(No Signal Available) appears at the top of the

on. The phone searches for your network and after finding

it.

At this point you can only make an emergency call (normal cell

phone service is not available).

PHONE

2. Press

and then tap

(Phone).

3. Enter the phone number to dial then press

ᮣ

Swipe the screen down to begin configuring different

phone parameters.

– or –

Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the

language, use the Language menu. For more information, refer to

“Language & Keyboard Settings” on page 208.

Swipe the screen Up to access the main screen and begin

using your device.

4. Press and hold

until the Phone options screen

appears.

Dialing Options Without a SIM card installed

5. Tap Power Off

(

PHONE

1. Press

and then tap

(Phone).

Locking and Unlocking the Phone

2. Enter the phone number to dial then press

By default, the phone screen locks when the backlight turns off.

3. If you enter a non-emergency number, you are notified

ᮣ

Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass either

Up or Down to unlock the phone screen.

there is not network available.

– or –

•

Swiping the screen Up launches the Jump Key Settings screen

from where you can assign shortcuts to your Jump Key or configure

the Lock screen shortcut.

If you enter an emergency number, your call is passed

along to emergency services.

•

Swiping the lock screen Down launches the Home screen from

where you can access your Phone, Applications, or Contacts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a New Google Account

™

You should create a Google Account when you first use your

device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This account

provides access to several device features such as Gmail, Google

Maps, Google Search, and the Android Market applications.

Before you are able to access Google applications, you must

enter your account information. These applications sync between

your device and your online Google account.

Accesses the

Jump Key Settings

screen

To create a new Google Account from your phone:

1. From the Home screen,

tap

2. Read the introduction and

tap Next Create to begin.

(Market).

➔

Accesses the

Home screen

3. Follow the on-screen

instructions to create a

Google Account.

– or –

Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use

of your phone. For more information, refer to “Setting up SIM Card

Lock” on page 197.

If this is not the first time

you are starting the phone,

APPS

tap

(Apps) ➔

(Gmail).

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Retrieving your Google Account Password

Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.

A Google account password is required for Google applications. If

you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow

these instructions to retrieve it:

To create a new Google Account from the Web:

1. From a computer, launch a Web browser and navigate to

1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate

www.google.com

to http://google.com/accounts.

2. On the main page, click Sign-in

➔

Create an account now.

2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.

3. Follow the onscreen prompts to create your free account.

3. Enter your account’s email address and click Submit

4. Look for an email from Google in the email box you

•

You can also use this site to recover your username.

provided, and respond to the email to confirm and activate

your new account.

4. Follow the remaining instructions to recover your

password.

Signing into Your Google Account

1. Launch an application that requires a Google account

(such as Android Market or Gmail).

Voice Mail

Setting Up Your Voice Mail

Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to

2. Click Next

➔

voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as

your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted, activate your

voicemail account.

3. Tap the Username and Password fields and enter your

information.

4. Tap Sign in. Your device communicates with the Google

Important!: Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access.

servers to confirm your information.

5. If prompted, create a new Gmail username by entering a

prefix for your @gmail.com email address.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice mail:

2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice

mail center.

Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.

Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone

1. Dial your wireless phone number.

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone) to access

the phone application.

2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk

2. Touch and hold the

key until the phone dials voice

key on the phone you are using.

mail.

3. Enter your passcode.

You may be prompted to enter a password.

Visual Voicemail

Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a

voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want

without being limited to chronological order.

3. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a

display name.

Accessing Your Voice Mail

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Visual Voicemail).

2. Read the onscreen information and tap Next

(Applications) ➔

You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding

(

on the keypad, by using the phone’s Application icon,

➔

Done

then touching the Voice Mail application. To access Voice Mail

to activate Visual Voicemail if this is the first time it was

accessed.A list of the voicemail messages displays.

using the menu:

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone) and then

touch and hold

until the phone dials voice mail.

Note: You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature.

Charges may apply. Please contact your service provider for further

details.

Note: Touching and holding

will launch Visual voicemail is it is already

active on your phone.

3. Touch a voicemail message to play it back.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• SUMMARY displays a visual graph indicating the available and

used space within the Random Access Memory (RAM), Program,

and External SD card.

Task Manager

Your phone can run applications simultaneously, with some

applications running in the background.

• HELP provides additional battery saving techniques.

Shutting Down an Currently Active Application

APPS

Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and

the biggest reason for this are background applications. These

are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and

are still active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you

see which of these applications are still active in the background

but also easily lets you choose which applications are left

running and which are closed.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Task Manager).

2. From the ACTIVE tab, tap Exit to close selected applications

or tap Exit all to close all background running applications.

Note: The larger the number of applications running on your phone, the

larger the energy drain on your battery.

Task Manger Overview

APPS

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Task Manager). This screen contains the following tabs:

• ACTIVE display those currently active applications running on your

phone.

• PACKAGE displays any installed packages or applications from the

Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove

them from your phone.

• RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access

Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear Memory for

either Level 1 or Level 2 (both Level memory locations).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 2: Understanding Your Phone

This section outlines key features of your phone. It also describes

the phone’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the

phone is in use.

•

Multiple Messaging Options: Email, Audio Postcard, Instant Messaging,

Picture Messaging, Google Talk, Google Search, Video Messaging, Text

Messaging, Predictive Text

•

Supports synchronizing with a corporate email account

3.0 megapixel camera and video with autofocus, multi shot.

Features of Your Phone

Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many

significant features. The following list outlines a few of the

features included in your phone.

Front facing camera and Qik for video chat

Brilliant widescreen TFT LCD (WVGA)

MP3 player with Multitasking features (Jump key)

Assisted GPS (TeleNav GPS Navigation)

Group and Cloud Texting

•

Touch screen with virtual (onscreen) QWERTY keyboard

Full pushbutton QWERTY keyboard (located below screen)

Optical Joystick

Social Networking integration

Webkit-based browser

High Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+) delivering data speeds faster

than the current 3G network technology.

Downloadable applications from the Android Market

Up to 32GB expandable memory slot

Mobile Hotspot Capability

•

Android 2.2 Froyo Operating system

Compatible with Adobe Flash 10.1

Wi-Fi Capability

T-Mobile TV

USB Tethering-capable

Samsung Media Hub

Bluetooth enabled

Slacker Radio

Full integration with Google applications (Gmail, YouTube, Google

Maps)

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following list correlates to the illustrations.

Front View

1. Jump key displays a list of quickly accessible and recently

used functions. This list continually changes based on your

frequent use of various features and functions.

The following illustrations show the main elements of your

phone:

2. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the

surface of the screen. This is typically used to detect when

your face is pressed up against the screen, such as during

a phone call.

–

While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and

locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.

3. Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust

the screen brightness/contrast.

•

In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device

to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.

•

In dim light conditions, the device increases the screen brightness

to compensate.

4. Display shows all the information needed to operate your

phone, such as the connection status, received signal

strength, phone battery level, and time.

5. Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Optical Joystick lets you highlight and select (tap) onscreen

13. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free headset

items.

so you can listen to music.

during phone calls and allows other

14.

Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in

Microphone is used

callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them.

It is also used to make voice note recordings.

standby mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice

When receiving an incoming call,

volume during a call.

pressing the volume key mutes the ring tone.

8. Menu key displays a list of options available for the current

screen. From the Home screen it displays Add, Wallpaper,

Search, Notifications, Reorder, and Settings options.

9. Notification LED visually blinks to display notification of

actions such as: New SMS and MMS received, Missed Call,

New Email, and Power Charging. For more information,

refer to “LED settings” on page 207.

10. Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while

facing the screen and allows you to video conference.

11. Home key displays the Home screen when pressed. Press

and hold to open the Notification panel.

12. Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the

different ring tones or sounds offered by your phone.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. Power/End key ends a call or switches the phone off and

on. Press and hold for two seconds to turn off Silent mode,

Mobile data connection, Flight mode, or to turn the phone

on or off.

16.

Camera key allows you to activate the camera and

camcorder and take pictures and videos.

17. USB Power/Accessory connector allows you to connect a

power cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data

cable.

Back View of Your Phone

The following illustration shows the external elements of your

phone:

1. Camera lens is used to take photos.

2. External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and

other sounds offered by your phone.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display settings

Phone Display

Your phone’s display provides information about the phone’s

status, and is the interface to the features of your phone. The

display indicates your connection status, signal strength, battery

status and time. Icons display at the top of the phone when an

incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a

specified time when an alarm was set. The screen also displays

notifications, and Shortcut icons: Phone, Apps/Home, and

Contacts.

In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the

wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.

APPS

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(Settings) ➔ Display. For more information, refer to

“Display Settings” on page 194.

Status Bar

The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,

signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays

notifications about incoming messages and calls and other

actions.

Signal strength

Connection Status

Battery status

Status Bar

Time

This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display

screen:

Google Search

Indicator Icons

Notification

area

This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display

and Indicator area:

Status

area

Home Screen

Displays your current signal strength. The greater the

number of bars, the stronger the signal.

Shortcuts

Indicates that the Flight Mode is active. You cannot

send or receive any calls or access online information.

Primary

Shortcuts

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indicates there is no signal available.

Displays when there is a system error or alert.

Displays when a call is in progress.

Displays when a call is on hold.

Shows your current battery only has three percent

power remaining and will immediately shutdown.

Represented as a blinking icon.

Displays when connected to the GPRS network.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the GPRS network.

Displays when connected to the EDGE network.

Displays when you have missed an incoming call.

Displays when the speakerphone is on.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the EDGE network.

Displays when connected to the 3G network.

Displays when Call forwardingis setto Always forward.

Fo r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Configurin g V oic e C alls”

on page 189.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the 3G network.

Displays your current battery charge level. Icon

shown is fully charged.

Displays when connected to the HSPA+ network.

100%

Displays your current battery charge level is

very low.

Displays when your phone is communicating with the

HSPA+ network.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Displays when the phone is connected to a computer

using a supported USB cable connection.

Displays when all sounds are silenced and Vibrate is

set to either Always or Only in SIlent mode. For more

information, refer to “Sound Settings” on page 192.

Displays when there is a new text message.

Displays when data synchronization and application

sync is active and synchronization is in progress

for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.

Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to

be delivered.

Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and

enabled.

Displays when there is a new voicemail message.

Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active

and communicating with an external device.

Displays when there is a new visual voicemail

message.

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected to and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP)

Displays in the notifications window when there is

a new Email message.

Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is no

communication with a target Wireless Access Point

(WAP).

Displays when the phone is in Silent mode. All sounds

except media and alarms are silenced, and

Vibratemodeisnotactive.Fo r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o

“Silent mode” on page 192.

Displays when the Mobile AP Hotspot feature is active

and communicating. For more information, refer to

“Mobile AP” on page 174.

Displays when an alarm is set.

For more information, refer to “Setting an Alarm” on

page 178.

Displays when the USB Tethering feature is active and

communicating. For more information, refer to

“Tethering” on page 184.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notification Bar

Displays when the phone’s location feature is on

and available for location-based services such as

GPS Navigation.

The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync

status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can

expand this area to provide more detailed information about the

current onscreen notification icons.

Displays when your phone’s GPS is on and

communicating.

1. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications panel (1).

Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active and

in use.

Displays when the external SD card (internal

microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from

the phone and is now ready for either removal or

formatting.

2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated

application (2).

Displays when the External SD card is being prepared

for mounting to the device. This is required for

communication with the External SD card.

Displays when the phone has detected an active USB

connection and is in a USB Debugging mode or the

microSD card has been improperly removed.

For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see

“Changing Your Settings” on page 181.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Back Key

Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the Home screen by

pressing and then tapping ( Notifications

)

The Back key (

) returns you to the previously active screen.

If the onscreen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the

keyboard.

Clearing Notifications

To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:

1. Tap the status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications panel

Menu Key

The Menu key (

) activates an available menu function for the

current screen or application. When on the Home screen, the

following menu options are available:

•

Add

Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, and Wallpapers.

Wallpaper ) lets you to customize the current screen’s

wallpaper image by choosing from either a Gallery, Live Wallpaper, or a

Wallpaper gallery).

(

) adds one of the following functions to a selected screen:

2. Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel.

Function Keys

Your phone comes equipped with five main function keys that

•

(

can be used on any screen: Home

Jump Key/Recent Applications,

Back Menu, and Search

–

You can obtain images from either your Pictures folder, from any of the

available images within the device’s Wallpaper gallery, or from the

animated Live Wallpapers.

Home Key

The Home key (

) takes you back to your Home screen

•

search for a key term both on the phone and online.

Notifications ) allows you to expand popup notifications area to

provide more detailed information about the current onscreen

notification icons.

(

) displays the Google Search box that you can use to

(#4 of the 7 total available screens).

Recent Applications - Jump Key

(

The Jump key (

) launches a screen from where you can

access both the Jump key settings/Lockscreen shortcut and

quickly access a recent list of recently used applications.

•

Reorder

(

) allows you to add or remove extended screens from

your device. You can have up to seven extended screens.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Settings

The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing

tapping Settings

Search Key

(

) provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.

2. Tap Voice Search

(

) ➔ Speak now to launch the Voice

–

and then

Search function.

➔

APPS

Using Google Search

Use the Google Search box to manually search for a term on both

your device and on the Web.

Lift open the screen (page 12) to reveal the Search key (

)

displays the Google Search box that can be used to search for

either a key term both on the phone and online. In some

instances, this key opens a search box specific only to the

current application.

1. Press

to launch the Google Search box.

to select a search area:

2. Tap

• All searches your device, the Web, and the Android Market for your

search term.

Voice Search

(speech to text)

Options

• Web searches for your term only on the Web using the Google

search engine.

• Apps searches for your term only within the Android Market.

• Contacts searches for your term only within your current Contacts

entries.

Field

3. Enter a search term and tap a match from the list of

suggestions, phone search results, or previously chosen

search matches. Once touched, the item opens in the

appropriate application.

1. Press

– or –

to launch the Google Search box.

– or –

Tapping Voice Search

(

) lets you speak into your

APPS

Press

and tap

➔

device's microphone to enter a search term.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Additional Voice Search Functions

•

note to self [message] allows you to search for a note save to your

Memo Pad.

For more information, refer to:

Home Screen

http://www.google.com/mobile/voice-actions/

The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications

on your phone. There are seven available panels, each populated

with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize each of

these panels.

From an open Voice Search dialog, speak the following words to

access additional features:

•

voice actions (such as: [your query]) allows you to search the web by

speaking the search parameters.

Status Bar

listen to [artist/song/album] allows you to begin listening to the

selected song on Slacker radio.

Google search

send text to [recipient] [message] allows you to open the Messaging

screen.

bar/Widget

Notification

area

navigate to [address/city/business name] allows you to receive

directions via Google maps™. Use either an Address name, Business

name, business type, or other navigation information to get the desired

directions.

Status

area

Home Screen

•

call [name] allows you to open the phone dial and automatically

send email to [recipient] [subject] allows you to open your email

account and compose a new email message.

Shortcuts

•

map of [location] allows you to view a map of an area via Google

maps. Use either an Address name, Business name, zip code, or other

navigation information.

Primary

Shortcuts

go to [website] allows you to navigate to any component of your

device.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user

notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress),

new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, emails, and

Text/MMS messages.

Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all

screens.

•

Google search is an onscreen Internet search engine powered by

Google™. Touch to access the Voice Search feature where you can

verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search.

Widgets are self-contained onscreen applications (not shortcuts).

These can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or

extended).

–

These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the

Status bar area) and display important user information.

–

This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the

Status bar (page 27) or by accessing the Notifications panel [

Notifications

(

)].

•

Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the

device such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 3G, 4G and

Wi-Fi communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.

Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as

Camera, YouTube, Voicemail, Contacts, Phone, Email, Market, etc.

These function the same as shortcuts on your computer.

Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information

about notifications and device status, and allows access to application

Widgets.

–

Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,

the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.

The Application screens can be accessed by tapping APPS

–

Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen

width to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other

customization features.

(

APPS

) from the Primary shortcuts area.

–

Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number

of times.

–

There are seven available extended screens (panels) each of which

may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens

share the use of the three Primary Shortcuts.

–

The current screen is indicated at the top by a thin square (quadrangle).

Up to seven (7) total screens are available.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Primary Shortcuts: are three shortcuts present throughout all of the

available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device

or launch any of the following functions:

PHONE

–

Phone

(

) launches the phone-related screen functions

Google

Search bar

(Dialer, Call logs, Favorites, and Voicemail).

–

Apps/Home toggles functionality between the Home and Application

screens.

APPS

•

Tap Applications

(

) to access the Application screens

loaded with every available local application.

HOME

•

While in the Applications screens, tap the Home icon (

to easily return to the Home screen.

)

Counter displays

the currently

active screen

–

Contacts

(

) launches the Contacts-related screens

CONTACTS

(Contacts, Groups, History, and Updates).

As you transition from screen to screen, the quadrangle (located

at the top) highlights to indicate the current page number.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and

buttons to select or activate an item. For example: press the

Navigation key to scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys

require you to press and hold them to activate a feature, for example,

you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone.

Screen Navigation

Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate

the features of your phone and enter characters. The following

conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation

action in the procedures.

•

Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on

the virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon

to open the application. A light touch works best.

Navigating Through the Screens

The following terms describe the most common hardware and

onscreen actions.

Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available

options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: press and hold

from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.

Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This

finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when

flicking through contacts or a message list.

Press and hold

Tap

Touch and hold

Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally

across the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to

scroll through a list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the

Home screen to scroll among the seven panels.

•

Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start

to move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target

position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Pinch: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom

out when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers inward to

zoom out.)

Swipe or slide

and Drag

Spread: “Spread” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom

in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers outward to

zoom in.)

Flick

Pinch (Zoom Out)

Spread (Zoom In)

Rotate

•

Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to

landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to

landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard,

or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.

Note: These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For more

information, refer to “Customizing the Screens” on page 45.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu Navigation

Note: The optical joystick can be disabled and then re-enabled at a later

time. For more information, refer to “Adjusting the Optical Joystick

settings” on page 213.

You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs

using both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and

features are accessed by scrolling through the available

on-screen menus. Your phone defaults with seven home screens.

There are two ways to navigate through a menu:

•

Using your finger

Using the Optical Joystick

Selecting Menu Items Using your Fingers

As you navigate through the menu, you activate menu options by

tapping the onscreen entry. Select any option by tapping it.

Navigation - Finger

Selecting Menu Items Using the Optical Joystick

The Optical Joystick acts as a dual touch-sensitive mouse

and OK/Enter key. As you navigate through a menu, options

are highlighted. Select any option by highlighting it and

Navigation - Optical Joystick

pressing

(Optical Joystick).

The direction of your onscreen movements while using the

Optical Joystick is determined by the current orientation of your

device.

•

When your QWERTY keyboard is visible, your device is placed into

Landscape mode.

•

When the keyboard is hidden, your device is placed into Portrait mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Navigating Through the Application Menus

Using Sub-Menus

There are three default Application Menus available. As you add

more applications from the Android Marketplace, more screens

are created to house these new apps.

Sub-menus are available from within most screen and

applications.

1. Press

phone screen.

2. Tap an option.

. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the

1. Press

Application Menu displays.

To close the Applications screen, tap

press

2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.

and tap

APPS

(

Applications). The first

HOME

•

(Home) or

3. Tap any of the onscreen icons to launch the associated

application.

Sub-Menu items

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Context Menus

Accessing Recently-Used Applications

1. Press

(Jump Key) to open the recently-used

Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that

apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to

menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on

your desktop computer.

applications window.

Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to the Jump Key

Settings

ᮣ

Touch and hold an item onscreen to open its context menu.

2. A pop-up displays the

seven most recently used

applications. The list is

arranged from most

recently used at the top.

Context

3. Tap a list entry to launch

the recent application.

Applications

The Application menu provides

quick access to the most

frequently used applications.

Applications display on each of

the three panels on the

Applications screens.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following table contains a description of each application

available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the

Applications screens. If the application is already described in

another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to

that particular section is provided. For more information on

navigating through the Application icons, see “Navigating

Through the Application Menus” on page 36.

AllShare

Allows you to share your on-device media content

with other external devices using DLNA (Digital Living

Network Alliance) and built-in AllShare™ technology.

Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.

For more information, refer to “AllShare” on page 134.

Amazon MP3

Accounts & sync

Launches the Amazon MP3 music download service

where you can download DRM-Free (digital rights

management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.

For more information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on

page 125.

Allows you to add applications and determine which

type of account information you want to synchronize

with your Contact list. For more information, refer to

“Accounts and Synchronization” on page 203.

Alarm & Clocks

AppPack

Allows you to set an alarm, configure and view the

World clock, use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The

applications display in a tabular format and quickly

accessed with the touch of a finger.

Installs the T-Mobile AppPack that allows you to

discover those applications that are compatible

specifically with your phone.

For more information, refer to “AppPack” on page 136.

For more information refer to Alarms & Clocks on

page 178, World clock on page 179, Stopwatch on

page 180, or Setting a Timer on page 180 of this user

guide.

Books

UseGoogleBooksto read over3 million ebookson thego.

For more information, refer to “Books” on page 136.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Calculator

Cloud Texting

Launches the onscreen calculator application. The

calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions;

addition,subtraction,multiplication,anddivision.Youcan

also use this as a scientific calculator.

The term "cloud" refers to the idea that there is no

hardware or software required for this function and that

the operation of your texting program is web-based.

For more information, refer to “Cloud Texting” on

page 107.

For more information, refer to “Calculator” on page 137.

DriveSmart

Calendar

DRIVE

SMART

Launches the DriveSmart application that can be used to

reduce distractions from your phone by silencing

notifications, routing calls to voicemail and customizing

auto responses to both callers and text message

respondents notifying them that your driving.

10 1112

Launches a calendar application that syncs to your

Facebook™, Google™, or Microsoft Exchange work

calendars.

141516171819

For more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 177.

Camera

Fo r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “DriveSmart” o n p age 139.

Launches the built-in 3.0 megapixel camera application

from where you can take a picture with either the front or

rear facing cameras. In addition to taking photos, the

built-in camera also doubles as a camcorder that also

allows you to record, view, and send high definition

videos.F o r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Usin g t h e C amera”

on page 116.

Provides access to both your Outlook (Exchange Server-

based) work email and Internet email accounts (such as

Gmail and Yahoo! Mail). For more information, refer to

“Email” on page 108.

Facebook

Launches the Facebook Web page via the browser. For

more information, refer to “Facebook” on page 140.

Note: An SD card must be inserted before the camera will take

and store photos.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Files

Group Texting

Lets you view supported imagefiles and text files on your

microSDcard.Organizeandstoredata,images,andmore

in your own personal file folders. Files are stored to the

memory card in separate (user defined) folders.

Provides the ability to create a group category,

populate that group with desired contacts (ex: Friends,

Coworkers, etc..), and then send a single text message

to all members of that group (similar to an email blast).

For more information, refer to “Group Texting” on

page 106.

For more information, refer to “Files” on page 125.

Gallery

Highlight

Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in

the microSD card. For more information, refer to “The

Gallery” on page 126.

This downloadable application/widget allows you to stay

up to date on relevant news, Android Market apps and

games (specific to your phone), T-Mobile ringtones,

CallerTunes and more. For more information, refer to

“Highlight” on page 141.

Gmail

Provides access to your Gmail account. Google Mail

(Gmail)isaweb-basedemailservice.Gmailisconfigured

when you first set up your phone. For more information,

refer to “Using Google Mail” on page 114.

Latitude

Lets you see your friends’ locations and share yours

with them. The application also lets you see your

friends’ locations on a map or in a list. It also lets you

send instant messages and emails, make phone calls,

and get directions to your friends’ locations.

Google Search

Provides anonscreen Internet search enginepowered by

Google™. For more information, refer to “Using Google

Search” on page 29.

For more information, refer to “Latitude” on page 142.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maps

Memo

Launches a Web-based dynamic map that helps you find

local businesses, locate friends, view maps and get

driving directions. Fo r m or e i nformation, refer t o “Maps”

on page 142.

Creates new text memos. For more information, refer to

“Memo” on page 147.

Messaging

Provides access to text and multimedia messaging (SMS

and MMS). For more information, refer to “Creating and

Sending Messages via Universal Composer” on

page 100.

Market

Allows you to find and download free and for-purchase

applications on Android Market. For more information,

refer to “Downloading a New Google Application” on

page 145.

Mini Diary

Allows you to create a mini diary where you can add a

photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable

life event.

Media Hub

Provides one-stop access to the hottest movies and TV

programs that you can rent or buy and watch anytime,

anywhere .F o r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Medi a H ub” on

page 129.

For more information, refer to “Mini Diary” on page 148.

My Account

Provides you with account specific information such as:

current status, current activity, Bill Summary, Plan

Services, Find a Retail Store, and FAQ’s Info. For more

information, refer to “My Account” on page 149.

Media Room

Provides a one-stop access point for all your local media

such as Music, Video and Slacker radio. For more

information, refer to “Using the Media Room” on

page 126.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

My Device

Setup Wizard

Allows you to configure device settings, view Tips

Tricks, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or

Wallpapers,orviewbatterystorageinformation.Fo r m ore

information, refer to “My Device” on page 150.

Provides access to a single menu screen from where

you can configure settings such as Accounts, Themes,

Jump Key Settings, and Connectivity. For more

information, refer to “Setup Wizard” on page 154.

Navigation

T-Mobile Mall

Launches a Web-based navigation application.

Thisdownloadableapplicationprovidesaccesstoseveral

phone features and tunes. For more information, refer to

“T-Mobile Mall” on page 154.

Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be

wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.

T-Mobile TV

Fo r m ore information, refer t o “Navigation” o n p age 151.

Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your phone. This

application is a subscription service. For more

information, refer to “T-Mobile TV” on page 155.

Places

Displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps.

When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business

or person, find out more information about the business,

see coupons, public responses, and more. For more

information, refer to “Places” on page 153.

Talk

Launches a Web-based Google Talk application that

lets you chat with family and friends over the Internet for

free. For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on

page 115.

Settings

Accesses the device’s built-in Settings menu. For more

information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on

page 181.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Task Manager

ThinkFree Office

Use Task Manager to see which applications are running

on your phone, and to end running applications to extend

battery life.

ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office

compatible office suite. This application provides a

central place for managing your documents online or

offline.

For more information, refer to “Task Manager” on

page 155.

For more information, refer to “ThinkFree Office” on

page 156.

TeleNav GPS Navigator

Tips & Tricks

This driving aid provides both audible and visual

navigation instructions for GPS navigation. For more

information, refer to “TeleNav GPS Navigator” on

page 156.

Use the learn functionality to understand more about the

features and functions on your phone.

For more information, refer to “Tips & Tricks” on

page 157.

Theme Changer

This applications allows you to change the phone’s

current theme. This function is also accessible via the

Setup Wizard. For more information, refer to “Theme

Changer” on page 156.

Twitter

Twitter is a social networking and microblogging

service that allows you make or answer questions by

sending short text messages up to 140 characters in

length, called "tweets", to your friends, or "followers."

For more information, refer to “Twitter” on page 157.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Universal Composer

Web

Allows you to compose messages that contain for more

than your everyday text and picture, but also multimedia

files and Google Map (GPS) information. Think of it as an

all-inonemessagingfunction.Formoreinformation,refer

to “Messages” on page 100.

Openthebrowsertostartsurfingtheweb. Thebrowseris

fully optimized andcomes with advanced functionality to

enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone.

For more information, refer to “Web” on page 161.

Wi-Fi Calling

Video Chat

Provides the ability to use your available Wi-Fi data

connection to make outbound calls that count against

your phone minutes. Similar to VOIP (Voice Over IP).

Fo r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Wi-F i C alling” o n p age 58.

Allows you to record and share live videos on your device

with your friends, family, and your favorite social

networks.F o r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Qi k V ide o C hat”

on page 158.

YouTube

Visual Voicemail

Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser.

For more information, refer to “YouTube” on page 132.

VisualVoicemailenablesuserstoviewalistofpeoplewho

left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message

they want without being limited to chronological order.

For more information, refer to “Visual Voicemail” on

page 18.

Voice Search

Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition

software and initiates a Google search based on the

recognized text. For more information, refer to “Voice

Search” on page 159.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding and Deleting Screens

Customizing the Screens

You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the

Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one

screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms

of media, while another screen might contain communication

apps such as Gmail and IM.

Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these

screens and then add them back later.

Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.

You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:

Important!: Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least

one screen.

•

Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens

Adding and Removing Shortcuts

Adding and Removing Widgets

Creating Folders

To delete a screen:

1. Press

then tap Reorder

2. Touch and drag the

➔

and

(

Changing the Background (Wallpapers)

undesired screen down

to the Remove tab

(

3. Press

to return to

the main Home screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To add a screen:

1. Press

2. Press

3. Press

and then tap

and then tap View type

and then tap Reorder. A box outline then

APPS

(

Applications).

1. Press

➔

and then tap Reorder

(

➔

Customizable grid

2. Tap the Add icon (

). The newly added screen appears

as the last page.

appears around the application icons.

3. Press

to return to the main Home screen.

4. Scroll through the list and locate the desired application.

Rearranging the Screens

5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it to its new

1. Press

➔

and then tap Reorder

(

location.

2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new

location. Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right

is screen position #7.

6. Press

and then tap Save

7. Tap

to return to the Home screen.

Managing Shortcuts

Rearranging Application Shortcuts

Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must carefully

touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the

screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can begin to move it to the

adjacent screen.

In addition to being able to rearrange screens, you can also

rearrange the order of the shortcuts within the three default

Application screens. This way you can place your favorite icons

on the first application page so you don’t have to scroll through

page after page.

If this does not work, delete it from its current screen. Activate the new

screen and then add the selected shortcut.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:

1. Press to go to the

Home screen.

To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:

1. Press to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

3. From the ADD TO HOME SCREEN window tap Shortcuts

4. Tap a selection from the available list.

To delete a shortcut:

2. Select a location (screen)

for your new shortcut by

scrolling across your

available screens until you

reach the desired one.

1. Press

to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from

APPS

3. Tap

its location on the current screen.

(

Applications) to reveal all

3. Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab (

) and release

your current available

it.

applications. By default,

applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid.

Adding and Removing Widgets

4. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired

Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on

any screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.

application.

To add a Widget:

5. Touch and hold the onscreen icon. The new shortcut then

1. Press

to go to the Home screen.

appears to hover over the current screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

6. While still holding the onscreen icon, position it on the

current screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock

the shortcut into its new position.

3. From the ADD TO HOME SCREEN window tap Widgets

4. Tap an available Widget to place it on your current screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To remove a Widget:

1. Touch and hold a

Widget until it unlocks

from the current

screen.

Creating and Managing a Folder

Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together

on the workspace.

To create a new onscreen folder:

1. Press

to go to the Home screen.

2. Drag the widget over

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

the Remove tab (

)

3. From the ADD TO HOME SCREEN window tap Folders

and release it.

4. Tap an available folder type and place it on the current

•

As you place the Widget

into the Trash, both items

turn red.

screen.

Renaming a folder

•

This action doesn’t delete

the Widget, it just

1. Tap the desired folder you want to rename.

2. With the folder open, touch and hold the Folder title bar

(top of the open Folder window) until the RENAME FOLDER

pop-up displays.

removes it from the

current screen.

To place a widget onto a different screen:

1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.

3. Tap the folder name field, enter a new title for this folder

2. Drag it to the edge of your screen.

and tap OK

3. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until it turns light

blue.

4. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.

5. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deleting a folder

•

Tap Wallpaper gallery, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper

image, then tap Set wallpaper

1. Touch and hold a desired folder. This unlocks it from its

location on the current screen.

2. Drag the folder over the Remove tab (

) and release it.

Managing Wallpapers

Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live

wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default

phone wallpapers).

Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery

power.

To change the current wallpaper:

1. Press

to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

3. From the ADD TO HOME SCREEN window tap Wallpapers

4. Select a Wallpaper:

•

Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image

gallery, crop the image, and tap Save

•

Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds,

once done tap Set wallpaper

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 3: Memory Card

Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card

(also referred to as a memory card) to expand available memory

space. This secure digital card enables you to exchange images,

music, and data between SD-compatible devices. This section

addresses the features and options of your device’s SD

functionality. The device has a USB SD card mode.

SD card Overview

After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your

computer to access and manage the SD card.

Important!: If access to the external SD card is not available, download and

install the USB drivers.

•

microSD card storage: up to 2GB in size

SDHC card storage: up to 32GB in size

microSD Icon Indicators

The following icons show your microSD card connection status at

a glance:

Using the SD Card

There are several methods for using the SD card:

1. Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music, videos,

or other types of files and media).

• the card has been unmounted (released from

use) from the device.

2. To activate the camera, video, music player, and other

• the card is being prepared for use and for

mounting.

dependant media or applications.

Important!: The Camera, Audio Postcard, Music Player, and Video

functionality is all dependant on a mounted SD card. Your device

can support SDHC cards up to 32GB capacity.

• the card has been improperly removed.

Memory Card

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable

Important!: DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or

transferring files. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data.

Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD

card. Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs

out while you are using the microSD card.

to the computer.

5. Tap Mass storage

➔

Connect USB storage ➔ OK. Both the

phone and computer display icons to show that the device

is mounted. As soon as the connection is established a

drive letter is assigned to the phone’s storage device.

Mounting the SD Card

To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must

mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card

establishes a USB connection with your computer.

6. Later, tap Turn Off to close the USB connection between the

phone and your computer, then disconnect the USB cable.

Important!: You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card.

Unmounting the SD card

Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the

SD card while removing it from the slot.

To mount the SD card:

1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot (For more

information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card”

on page 9.)

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

SD card and phone storage.

2. Tap Unmount SD card ➔ OK.

2. Press and hold

to turn on the phone.

3. When the “SD card will be unmounted” message displays

and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list, open

the phone and remove the SD card. For more information,

refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card” on page 9.

3. Verify Ask on connection is set as the default USB setting.

•

Press

Applications

Tap Ask on connection

➔

and then tap

(

Settings

)

➔

USB settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SD card Memory Status

Factory Data Reset

To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:

From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to

the factory default settings.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

Privacy

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

SD card and phone storage. The available memory

displays under the Total space and Available space

headings.

2. Tap Factory data reset. This action erases all data from

your phone except current system software and bundled

applications, or SD card files such as music or photos.

Erasing Files from the SD card

You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.

1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,

refer to “Mounting the SD Card” on page 51.

3. Tap Reset phone

➔

Erase everything.

2. Press

SD card and phone storage ➔ Unmount SD card

3. Tap Format SD card Format SD card Erase everything

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

OK.

➔

to format the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all

the data stored on it.

Memory Card

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List

This section describes features and functionality associated with

making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to

store contact information.

Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings menu, the

phone automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not

answer the call or is already on the phone, provided your call is not

sent to voice mail.

Displaying Your Phone Number

ᮣ

Press

About phone

Phone number field.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Ending a Call

➔

Status. Your phone number displays in the

ᮣ

Briefly tap

key to end the call.

PHONE

Note: To redial a recent number, tap

(Phone) ➔ CALL LOG,

locate a number from the list, and tap

Note: The phone’s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing

and

APPS

then tapping

➔

(Settings).

If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen,

You are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the

green bar within the Status bar.

Making a Call

You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM

card or to the phone’s memory. These entries are referred to as

the Contacts list.

In Call Notification

PHONE

1. Press

and then tap

(Phone).

2. Enter the phone number to dial then press

If you make a mistake while dialing, tap

ᮣ

to clear the

last digit. Touch and hold

sequence.

to clear the entire

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Add 2 sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a

Dialing Options

When you enter numbers on the

Keypad, you will see three

on-screen options.

2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing

after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed).

Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone

waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be

From the keypad screen, use

one of the following options:

manually sent by tapping Send

Answering a Call

When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the

incoming call image.

•

Call

number.

Delete

(

) to call the entered

(

) to delete digits

The caller's phone number, picture, or name if stored in Contacts

List, displays.

from the current number.

Voice Dialer ) to launch

the voice recognition application.

To view additional dialing

options, tap Menu).

Add to Contacts to add the

(

ᮣ

At the incoming call screen:

•

Touch and slide

to the right to answer the call.

to the left to reject the call.

(

•

Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and

touch a predefined rejection message.

current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry.

Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you can

assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.

Send message to send the current caller a text message while still

maintaining the current call active.

Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.

If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the

entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone

number, if available.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To add a prefix:

1. Tap Prefix dialling list

add a prefix.

➔

Create. The list is empty until you

2. Enter a prefix number using the keypad and tap Save. The

Touch and drag

upward to reject

with a message

prefix displays in the Prefix dialing list.

Touch and slide

right to answer

the call

3. Tap the circle icon beside the prefix. A green icon indicates

the selection of a prefix.

Touch and slide

left to reject

the call

4. Each time you dial a number, the activated prefix is

automatically added to the dialed number.

5. Touch another prefix in the Prefix dialing list to change

Prefix Dialing

prefixes.

When activated, this feature automatically prepends a string of

numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number. This

feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an area

code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one

prefix.

To delete a prefix:

1. From the Home screen, press

Call settings All calls

dialling list

2. Press

(

Menu) and then tap

➔

Prefix dialing Prefix

➔

1. From the Home screen, press

Settings) ➔ Call settings

(

Menu) and then tap

➔

Delete.

(

➔

All calls Prefix dialing.

➔

3. Tap selected prefixes to remove from them from the list.

2. Tap the Enable prefix dialling field. A check mark indicates

– or –

the Prefix dialling feature is active.

Tap Select all

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap Delete

2. Press

and then tap Add 2 sec pause. This feature

adds an automatic two-second pause.

International Calls

PHONE

3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone), then

dialed automatically after the second pause.

touch and hold

. The + symbol displays.

ꢂ

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area

Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple

code, and phone number.

2-sec pauses.

•

If you make a mistake, tap

once to delete a single digit.

4. Tap

Touch and hold to delete all digits.

Wait Dialing

3. Tap

Inserting a Wait into your dialing

sequence means that the phone

waits until it hears a dial tone

before proceeding with the next

sequence of numbers.

Pause Dialing

You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with

automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone

numbers.

•

2-Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after

1. From the Home screen,

a two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a

PHONE

tap

(Phone)

comma (

,).

and use the on-screen

keypad to enter the

phone number.

•

Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping

indicated in the number string as a semicolon (;).

. This is

Send

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone) and use

the on-screen keypad to enter the phone number.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Press

and then tap Add wait. This feature causes the

Setting Up Speed Dial Entries

phone to require your acceptance before sending the next

set of entered digits.

Important!: Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other

number can be assigned to this slot.

3. Tap

1. From the Home screen,

4. Once prompted, tap

to dial the remaining digits.

Send

PHONE

tap

Redialing the Last Number

2. Press

and then tap

The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,

received, or missed if the caller is identified.

Speed dial setting. The

Speed dial screen

displays a virtual keypad

with the numbers 1

through 9.

To recall any of these numbers:

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone) and tap

2. Tap the CALL LOG tab to display the list of recent calls.

3. Tap an unassigned

number. The Contacts

screen displays.

Call

3. Tap the name/number and tap

– or –

Tap

to the right of the name/number.

4. Tap a listed contact to

assign it to the selected speed dial location. The selected

contact number/image is displayed in the speed dial

number box.

Speed Dialing

Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List,

you can set up to 8 speed dial entries and then dial them easily

whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric

key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing a Speed Dial Entry

Making a Call Using Speed Dial

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone).

You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the

Contacts List for speed dialing.

2. Press

and then tap Speed dial setting.

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone).

Important!: The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number

2. Touch and hold a speed dial location (numbers 2-9, or 1 if

cannot be assigned to this slot.

you are dialing voice mail) until the number begins to dial.

3. Press

and then tap Change order.

3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, access the

4. In a single motion, touch and drag an entry over another

keypad and tap

speed dial number to view the assigned phone number.

Wi-Fi Calling

➔

Speed dial setting and touch a

location on the virtual keypad.

5. Tap Save to store the new assignment.

6. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for T-Mobile customers with a Wi-Fi

capable phone. Wi-Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage

issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is

limited. Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network

count against available rate plan minutes.

Removing a Speed Dial Entry

1. From the Home screen, tap

PHONE

(Phone).

2. Press

and then tap Speed dial setting.

The benefits of Wi-Fi Calling include the following:

3. Touch and hold an on-screen speed dial location and

select Remove from the context menu.

– or –

•

Wi-Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current

in-home coverage experience

•

Wi-Fi Calling works anywhere you can connect to an available Wi-Fi

network.

Press

➔

Remove. Tap an entry and select Remove

4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Launching Wi-Fi Calling

Important!: Wi-Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching

Wi-Fi Calling.

Note: Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point.

Activating Wi-Fi:

1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the

status bar. The network names and security settings (Open

network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks

display in the Wi-Fi networks section.

1. Press

network

➔

and then tap

➔

Wireless and

➔

Wi-Fi settings.

2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. A checkmark displays to indicate

activation.

Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.

3. Tap an available WAP (Wireless Access Point) from within

the Wi-Fi networks area of the page. Follow the on-screen

instructions to complete connection.

Wi-Fi Connected

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Note: To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi-Fi calling

when outside the United States, the Data Roaming feature on your

device must be turned off.

Wi-Fi Communication Issue

Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a

communication issue with the target Wireless

Access Point (WAP).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPS

2. From the Home screen, tap

Wi-Fi Calling).

(Applications) ➔

When Action

Then

(

Displays on the You are connected to the

3. If prompted to register onto the T-Mobile network prior to

screen status

bar.

T-Mobile network and can

make Wi-Fi calls.

use, tap Register to complete the process.

4. Tap the slider to

activate Wi-Fi

Does not display You are charged normal calling

on the screen

status bar.

rate minutes. For more

information,referto “Activating

Wi-Fi” on page 181.

Calling. The

slider shows On

Your device

connects to the

T-Mobile

5. Use the phone Dialer, call log, or contacts list to make a

call. For more information, refer to “Making a Call” on

page 53.

Wi-Fi Calling

activation

slider

Network.

6. Confirm you established a Wi-Fi calling connection to the

T-Mobile network by making sure

of the screen.

appears at the top

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting the Call Volume

In Call Options

Your phone provides a number of features that are available for

use during a call.

During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone,

to adjust the earpiece volume.

ᮣ

Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and

the Down volume key to decrease the level.

– or –

From the screen during a call, press the Up Volume key.

From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using

these keys.

Place a call

Dials the

on hold

Placing a Call on Hold

number

You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your

network supports this service, you can also make another call

while a call is in progress.

Adds a

Ends the

new call

call

Mutes or

Unmutes

call

Activates

speakerphone

To place a call on hold:

Activates the

1. Tap Hold to place the current call on hold.

Bluetooth headset

2. Tap Resume to activate the call that is on hold.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To make a new call while a call is in progress:

1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it

up in Call history.

Muting a Call

Mute

1. Tap

(Mute off) so the other caller cannot hear you

speaking.

Mute

2. Tap Add call to dial the second call.

2. Tap

(Mute on) to turn mute off and resume your

conversation.

3. Dial the new phone number and tap

Switching to Bluetooth Headset

To switch between the two calls:

1. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of

ᮣ

Tap Swap.

Headset

speaker by tapping

(Headset).

The In call number turns gray and displays On hold. The

active call displays a green background behind the

number.

2. At the prompt, tap Yes to enable Bluetooth if it is not

already activated.

Turning the Speakerphone on and off

More In-call Options

While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following

these steps:

During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the

Contacts list, or create a Memo.

Speaker

1. Tap

(Speaker off) to turn the speakerphone on.

Viewing the Contacts List

Speaker

2. Tap

(Speaker on) to turn the speakerphone off.

During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.

1. Press

2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.

3. Press to return to the active call.

and then tap Contacts.

Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is teal. When the

speaker is turned Off, the color of the speaker is gray.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Memo During a Call

3. Tap Add call, enter the second phone number and

tap . The first caller is placed on hold.

During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note).

1. Press

and then tap Memo.

4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and

tap Merge. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party

call and display in the order in which they were called.

2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save

Automatic screen lock

If you configured your phone with the Automatic screen lock

option, during a call your screen locks to prevent accidental

screen presses. To temporarily unlock the screen press the lock

key (on the right side of the phone).

Important!: A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi-party

line. Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session

and held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call. You can

swap or place each multi-party call on hold.

Having a Private Conversation With One Participant

Multi-Party calls

Making a Multi-Party Call

When you have two participants

in a multi-party session, you

might be necessary to place one

of those participants on hold so

that a private conversation can be

held with a single caller. While

you are in a multi-party call:

A multi-party call is a network service that allows up to six

people to participate in a multi-party or conference call.

For further details about subscribing to this service, contact

T-Mobile customer service.

Setting up a Multi-Party Call

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone).

2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Call Waiting

1. Press

and then tap Manage Conference Call

You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in

progress, if this service is supported by the network and you

must have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate.

2. Tap

(Split) adjacent to the participants you would

like to split from the current call. The list displays the

callers in the order they were dialed.

You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. For

more information, refer to “Configuring Voice Calls” on

page 189.

3. Tap the number for the participant in which you want to

speak privately.

You can now talk privately to that person while the other

participants can continue to converse with each other. If

there is only one other participant, that person is placed on

hold.

To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:

1. In a single motion, touch

and slide it to the right to

answer the new incoming call.

4. To return to the multi-party call, tap the Merge icon. This

action joins both participants into a single multi-party call.

If the multi-party call participants can now hear each other.

Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller is

placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.

2. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the

new caller on hold and activates the previous call. The

active call displays with a green background.

Dropping One Participant

1. Press

and then tap Manage Conference Call

3. Tap Swap again to switch back.

End

2. From within an active conference all tap

to the right

of the party. The participant is disconnected and you can

continue the call with the other participant.

3. Tap

to end the current call.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessing the Call Log Tab

1. From the Home screen, tap

CALL LOG tab.

Call Logs Tab

PHONE

(

Phone

)

➔

The Call logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts

entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Call logs

tab make redialing a number fast and easy. It is continually

updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the

beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the

bottom of the list.

2. Tap an entry to view available options.

Note: The CALL LOG tab only records calls that occur while the phone is

turned on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be

included in your calling history.

The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays

phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:

Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and

Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).

Displays when a call is in progress.

Displays when a call was missed.

Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.

Indicates any received calls that were answered.

Indicates a missed call.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessing Call Logs from The Notifications Area

Call Log - Caller Overview

1. Locate

from the Notifications area of the Status bar.

Call options (tap)

2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications panel (1).

CALL LOG screen

3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen (2).

Entry-specific

context menu

Tip: Press

and then tap Notifications to open the panel.

(touch and hold)

This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also

choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on

how they are touched.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the call options screen:

Altering Numbers from the Call Log

• Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number.

If you need to make a call from the CALL LOG screen and you

need to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the

appropriate prefix by prepending the number.

• Message allows you to create a new text message to the selected

entry.

• Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration.

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Phone

)

➔

• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your

Contacts.

CALL LOG tab.

2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific

•

Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context menu:

context menu.

• Call [Number] to redial the current phone number.

• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the

3. Tap Edit number before call

4. Edit the number using the on-screen dialpad or delete

digits by pressing to erase the numbers.

5. Tap once the number has been changed.

selected entry.

• Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone

number prior to redial.

• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your

Contacts.

• View contact to view the information for the currently stored

Contacts entry.

• Send contact information to send the Log entry information via

text message.

• Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic

rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be

blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.

• Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Erasing the Call Log

Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen

You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current

entries from the Call logs list.

When you are unable to

answer a call for any reason

and your screen is locked, the

number of missed calls are

displayed on the Lock screen

immediately after a call is

missed.

To clear a single entry from the list:

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Phone

)

➔

CALL LOG tab.

2. Touch and hold an entry and select Delete

To view a missed call

immediately:

To clear all entries from the list:

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone

)

➔

1. Press

CALL LOG tab.

reactive the screen.

2. Press

and then tap Delete.

Delete OK

2. Touch and drag the

3. Tap Select all

➔

slider (with the number

of missed calls on it)

down the screen. The main Home screen is then displayed.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 5: Entering Text

Thissectiondescribeshowtoselectthedesiredtextinputmethod

when entering characters into your phone. This section also

describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the

amount of key strokes associated with entering text. Your phone

comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the

phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways

(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.

Selecting the Text Input Method

The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two

locations:

Settings Menu:

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Locale

and text

➔

Select input method

Your phone also provides several on-screen keypad text entry

options to make the task of text entry that much easier.

Text Input field:

1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and hold

Text Input Methods

There are three text input methods available:

the text input field to open the context-menu.

2. Select the desired input method (Swype or Samsung

•

QWERTY keyboard: located below the screen, can be used at any

time to enter text and override the current text input method. For more

information, refer to “Language & Keyboard Settings” on

page 208.

keypad).

Default Onscreen

Input Method

•

Samsung Keypad: an on-screen QWERTY keypad that can be

used in both portrait and landscape orientation.

Swype (default): a new way to enter text on touch screens.

Instead of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each

letter of a word.

The on-screen QWERTY keypad only works in portrait mode.

Landscape use must be done via the physical QWERTY keyboard.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring SWYPE Settings

Important!: At any time, you can access the QWERTY keyboard and directly

enter text. For more information, refer to “Accessing the QWERTY

Keyboard” on page 12.

1. Press

Swype

➔

and then tap

➔

Locale and text

➔

Entering Text Using Swype

2. Locate the Preferences section to alter these settings:

Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter

a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting

your finger between words. SWYPE uses error correcting

algorithms and a language model to predict the next word.

SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system.

• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.

Default language is US English.

• Word prediction: predicts words as you are typing.

• Audio feedback: turns on sounds generated by the Swype

application.

The onscreen keyboard options are different between the Android

keyboard and Swype onscreen input methods.

• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter

text using the keypad.

• Enable tip indicator: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.

3. Locate the Swype Advanced Settings section to alter these

settings:

Enabling and Configuring SWYPE

If you configure another text input method (Samsung keypad) you

must re-enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard.

• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.

When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the

next word.

Even when SWYPE is enabled, you can still use both the physical

and on-screen keyboard functionality.

1. Press

and text

2. Tap Select input method

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Locale

• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a

sentence.

• Show complete trace: sets the length of time the word trace line

remains on-screen as you swipe across the screen. Move the slider

➔

Swype.

between Shorter or Longer and tap OK

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Word choice window: sets the amount of times the word choice

Swype Text Entry Tips

selection window displays on screen. Move the slider between

You can access the SwypeTips

application and watch a video

or tutorial on using Swype. You

can also use the following

Swype text entry tips.

Never or Always and tap OK

• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to on-

screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or

Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK

4. Locate the Help section to alter these settings:

•

Create a squiggle (like an S

shape) to create a double letter

(such as pp in apple).

Touch and hold a key to view the

punctuation menu then make a

selection.

• Swype help: provides access to the on-line Swype Help

information.

• Tutorial: a short tutorial that helps you to get started using Swype.

5. Locate the About section to review the Swype application

information:

Move your finger or stylus over

the apostrophe to enter

contractions.

• Version: displays the current software version.

Double-touch on the word you

want to change to correct a misspelled word, then touch the delete key

to erase one character. Touch and hold the delete key to erase an

entire word.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–

123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common

punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates SYM

SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button

indicates 123ABC

Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input

field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

• SWYPE tips: Tapping this button displays the Swype tips and

tutorial screen.

2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the

following text mode options:

123

Text input field

• 123 ABC

to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from

ABC

the onscreen keyboard.

SYM

• SYM (Symbol)

to enter symbols from the onscreen

keyboard.

Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the

key changes to

and all letters that follow are in lower case.

Additional

Functions

Current Mode

Swype Keyboard Overview

• Text Input field: a field where text, number, or other characters can

CAPS/ALT

be entered.

key

• Additional Functions: provides additional message options.

Delete

• CAPS/ALT key: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the

capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM

mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.

SWYPE Tips

• Text Input mode: There are two available modes: 123ABC and

SYM.

Text Input

mode

Voice actions

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE

All lowercase

In 123ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few common

Displays when the next character is entered in

lowercase.

punctuation marks from the onscreen keyboard. The text mode

key shows

SYM

Initial Uppercase

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input

Displays when the next character is entered as

uppercase but all subsequent characters are

lowercase.

field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

Note: An on-screen landscape keyboard is not available since in this

orientation you can use the QWERTY keyboard found below the screen.

All Uppercase

123

2. Tap

to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode

Displays when all characters will be entered as

uppercase characters.

ABC

(showing letters and numbers on the onscreen keys). Once

SYM

in this mode, the text input type shows

By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the

following letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you

lift your finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the

word.

Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the

key changes to

and all letters that follow are in lower case.

3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a

To enter text via Swype:

word.

This example shows a user entering the word “there”. Put your

finger down on the “t”, and without lifting, glide it to the “h”, and

then to the “e”, and then over to the “r”, and back to the “e”.

When complete, lift your finger off the screen to allow the device

to determine the closest word match.

–

If you make a mistake, tap

to erase a single character. Touch

to erase an entire word.

to send the message.

and hold

4. Tap

SEND

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the Samsung Keypad

This on-screen keypad can be used to enter text while in a

portrait orientation.

Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an on-screen

popup appears to provide additional word choices.

Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE

Enabling Samsung Keypad

By using the onscreen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols

are not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys). In SYM mode

using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers from

This device has a built-in on-screen QWERTY keypad that is

available in portrait mode. Using the QWERTY keypad/ keyboard,

you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other characters.

the onscreen keyboard. Once in SYM mode, the text mode key

123

ABC

To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings

to default to the Samsung keypad.

shows

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input

1. Press

and text

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔ Locale

field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

➔

Select input method

➔

Samsung keypad

SYM

2. Tap

to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once

– or –

From a screen where you can enter text, tap and hold the

123

ABC

in this mode, the text input type shows

3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want

text input field and tap Input method

➔

Samsung keypad

to enter.

2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung

4. Touch and hold an on-screen key to enter the secondary

keypad configuration for all subsequent text input.

symbol (above the main one on the same key).

5. Tap

to choose from additional symbols.

For example:

•

To enter

: tap SYM and select the

key.

~: tap SYM and select the

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the Text Input Mode in Keypad

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input

field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

2. Tap

to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once

ABC

in this mode, the text input type shows ?123 .

Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the

key changes to

2. With Samsung keypad as your text entry method, select

one of the following text mode options:

and all letters that follow are in lower case.

3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.

• ABC ABC to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen

keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays

?123

–

If you make a mistake, tap

to erase a single character. Touch

to erase an entire word.

to send the message.

and hold

• SYM (Symbol) ?123 to enter numbers by pressing the numbers

4. Tap

selecting them on the onscreen keyboard. In this mode, the text

SEND

mode button displays

ABC

All lowercase

Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, tap

to toggle

Displays when the next character is entered in

lowercase.

capitalization.

Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keypad

Initial Uppercase

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input

Displays when the next character is entered as

uppercase but all subsequent characters are

lowercase.

field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

Note: An on-screen landscape keyboard is not available since in this

orientation you can use the QWERTY keyboard found below the screen.

By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the

following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the

cursor automatically advances to the next space.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Symbol Mode in Samsung Keypad

•

The first number on this key indicates which page (1, 2, or 3) of

additional characters is active.

Use Symbol Mode to add numbers, symbols, or emoticons. While

Configuring Samsung Keypad Settings

1. Press

in this mode, the text mode key displays

ABC

➔

and then tap

➔

Locale and text

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input

➔

Samsung keypad.

field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.

– or –

From within an active text entry screen, tap

from

Important!: To use the Samsung keypad, the phone must be maintained in a

portrait orientation. If you need to change the orientation of the

screen to Landscape, we recommend using the QWERTY

keyboard beneath the screen.

the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad

settings screen.

2. Set any of the following options:

?123

2. Tap

to configure the keyboard for Symbol

• Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration

ABC

mode.Once in this mode, the text input type shows

Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.

(Qwerty Keypad [default] or 3x4 Keypad).

• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from the

available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language.

ABC

3. Tap

to return to ABC mode where the key shows

• XT9 enables predictive text entry mode. This must be enabled to

gain access to the advanced settings. For more information, refer to

“Using XT9 Predictive Text” on page 77.

?123

To enter symbols:

?123

1. Tap

to enter ?123 mode.

• XT9 advanced settings configuration of more advanced XT9

features. For more information, refer to “Using XT9 Predictive

Text” on page 77.

2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.

– or –

• Keypad sweeping automatically moves the screen in the direction

your finger moves along the screen.

Tap

to select from additional symbol characters.

1/3

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Auto-capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the

first word in each sentence (standard English style).

3. Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the

following advanced options:

• Voice input activates the Voice input feature. This is an

experimental feature that uses Google’s networked speech

recognition application.

• Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to

complete the word you have started. (A check mark indicates the

feature is enabled.)

• Auto full stop automatically inserts a full stop by tapping the space

bar twice.

• Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered

before a word prediction is made. Choose from 2 letters, 3 letters,

4 letters, or 5 letters.

• Tutorial launches a brief onscreen tutorial covering the main

concepts related to the Samsung keypad.

• Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical

errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the

characters of the keys you touched, and those of nearby

Using XT9 Predictive Text

XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and

regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing

the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.

characters. (A check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)

• Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter.

(A check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)

• Auto-append automatically adds predictions to the word you are

typing. (A check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)

Note: XT9 is only available when ABC mode is selected. XT9 advanced

settings are available only if the XT9 field has been selected.

• Auto-substitution allows the device to automatically replace

misspelled or miskeyed words. This option reduce “typos.” (A

check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)

1. Press

Samsung keypad.

2. Tap the XT9 field. A checkmark indicates activation.

➔

and then tap

➔

Locale and text

➔

• Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused

when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys. (A check mark

indicates the feature is enabled.

• Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list

after selecting the wrong word from the list.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built-in XT9

dictionary.

text entry fields or other applications as easily as on your

computer.

–

Tap

(Add word).

To remove the battery cover:

Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new word.

1. Locate the cover release latch and place your fingernail in

the opening and firmly “pop” the cover off the device

(similar to a soda can).

Tap Done to store the new word.

• XT9 auto-substitution allows you create a word rule by adding

words for automatic substitution during text entry (for example

youve becomes you’ve).

2. Remove the cover. For more information, refer to “Battery

–

Tap the XT9 auto-substitution field. Flick up or down to review the

current list of word substitutions.

Cover” on page 7.

To open the device and access the keyboard:

1. Turn the phone over to where the logo appears at the

upper-right (1).

–

Press

and tap Add.

Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field (for

example, youve).

–

Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field (for

example, you?fve).

2. Carefully grasp the base of the phone with both hands.

Tap Done to save the substitution rule.

3. While holding onto both sides of the phone, use your

thumbs to push against the bottom edge of the LCD (2).

After the initial push, the LCD will then quickly slide away

to reveal the QWERTY keyboard (3). For more information,

refer to “Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard” on page 12.

4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard

Your phone has a full, slide-out QWERTY keyboard. The keyboard

is located beneath the display screen and is accessed by sliding

it open. This orients the phone's display to Landscape

(widescreen) mode. With the QWERTY keyboard, you can type

letters, numbers, punctuation, and other special characters into

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To reveal additional QWERTY text editing options:

1. Touch and hold an active text entry field.

2. From the Edit text context menu, tap an available function:

• Select all highlights all characters in the text message field.

• Select text/Stop selecting text lets you manually highlight

characters in the text message field.

• Cut all cuts all characters in the current text message field.

• Copy copies selected characters in the current text message field.

• Copy all copies all characters in the current text message field.

• Paste inserts the previously cut or copied text into the message

field.

• Input method provides additional text input methods (Swype or

Samsung keypad). (When the QWERTY keyboard is open, Swype

and Samsung keypad are disabled.)

Using the QWERTY Keyboard

In this section we’ll cover the steps necessary to enter text using

the QWERTY keyboard. Using your phone's QWERTY keyboard is

just like using any standard computer keyboard. The following

keys perform special functions when entering text:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering Symbols and Smileys

Search: Displays the Quick Search box that can

be used to search for a key term both on the

phone or online. For more information, refer to

“Search Key” on page 29.

Most symbols and punctuation marks appear as alternate

characters above the primary letters and numbers on the

QWERTY keyboard. To access these symbols, press

then press the appropriate key.

and

and then

Alt: Allows you to use the alternate characters

displayed at the top of the QWERTY keys.

Examples: -), +, @, #, etc..

Emoticons (Smileys) are accessed by pressing

selecting an image from the Emoticons page that is then inserted

at your current cursor position.

Shift: Changes the text input mode among

Upper/Lower/Mixed case mode.

To enter symbols:

1. Position the cursor where you want the symbol to appear

within your message.

Space: Inserts an empty space.

2. Press

and then press the key corresponding to the

Voice Search: Launches the Voice Search

function. For more information, refer to “Using

Google Search” on page 29.

symbol you want to insert.

•

For example, to enter “ #1,” you would use the keyboard sequence

shown below.

Emoticons: Launches the Emoticons page.

Scrolldownandtapanentryfromtheextensive

list of emoticons.

•

OK/Enter: Moves the insertion point to the next

line in a message.

Delete: Deletes the previous character, similar

to the backspace key on a computer keyboard.

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To enter “smileys” (emoticons):

1. Position the cursor where you want the emoticon to appear

within your message.

2. Press

to open the onscreen Emoticons page.

3. Scroll through the list and select a smiley by touching the

onscreen icon.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 6: Contacts

This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List.

You can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.

4. From the Manage

accounts area, tap

next to the account you

want to synchronize.

– or –

Accounts

From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to

synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you

want the applications to synchronize automatically. After

determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate

which account to synchronize with your Contacts list.

Tap Add account to create

a new account.

1. Sign in to your Google account.

5. Tap an account type to

2. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

add.

Accounts and sync

6. Follow the on-screen

instructions. Theselected

account type

3. From the GENERAL SYNC SETTINGS section, touch one of

the following options:

synchronizes with your Contacts list.

• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the

background.

• Auto-sync: automatically synchronizes your data with the phone.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.

Contacts List

Creating a Contact

Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters, contacts

stored on the phone can be lost.

The default storage location for

saving phone numbers to your

Contacts List is your phone’s

built-in memory.

•

SIM contacts are stored within the SIM Card.

Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry.

Some SIM types can also store email information.

If existing Google and Corporate

email accounts have been

synchronized to your phone,

these will be made available to

your device during the creation

of new entries. These new

Contacts entries can be

assigned or saved to synced

accounts such as Phone, SIM,

Google, or Corporate.

•

T-Mobile Contacts Backup contacts are stored remotely on the

T-Mobile servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has

been damaged or reset.

Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can

also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail

account.

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or Outlook)

contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either

an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook

Your phone automatically sorts

the Contacts entries alphabetically. You can create either a

Note: When storing an entry into your SIM card, note that only the Name and

Number are saved. To save additional information for a particular

contact, such as notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that

Contact into your phone’s onboard memory.

Phone

SIM, T-Mobile Contacts Backup, Google, or Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync contact.

Some SIM cards can store several emails.

Note: Before you can save a contact to the Phone, Contact settings must be

set to Save new contacts to Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note: Contact information stored on the phone can be lost if the device is

Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected

destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google

destination type).

ever factory reset.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap

(Contacts).

7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.

(

Add to Contacts) to add a contact.

•

Tap

on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously

entered phone number.

Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad

and pressing and then tap Add to Contacts Create contact

•

Tap

to enter an additional phone number

to remove a previously entered phone number.

Google Talk,

POSTAL ADDRESS

➔

Continue with step 3.

8. Enter additional information such as: Email

3. Tap a destination type (Phone SIM, T-Mobile Contacts

Instant msg GROUPS, RINGTONE

backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

)

ORGANIZATION or MORE fields to input additional category

(depending on where you want to save the new contact

information).

information.

•

The More field contains the following options: NOTES, NICKNAME,

4. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name

WEBSITE, BIRTHDAY, and ANNIVERSARY.

for this contact using the displayed keypad.

•

Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields

and categories.

5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.

9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.

Selections are: Album, or Take photo

6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)

to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home Work

Work fax Home fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback

To save a Number from your Keypad:

PHONE

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone).

2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Tap Add to Contacts

➔

Create contact or Update existing

Note: For further details about how to enter characters, see “Text Input

(select the Contact entry from the on-screen list).

– or –

Methods” on page 69.

Finding a Contact

Press

and then tap Add to Contacts

➔

Create contact

You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names

onto either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an

external location (such as Google, Exchange, or T-Mobile

Backup). They are all physically separate but are used as a single

entity, called Contacts.

or Update existing (select the Contact entry from the on-

screen list).

•

If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and

proceed to step 5.

Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the

maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may

differ.

4. Tap a destination type (Phone SIM, T-Mobile Contacts

backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange Active Sync).

5. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

for this contact.

2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.

6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)

– or –

to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home

Work,

Tap the Search contacts field and begin entering the entry’s

name. Matching entries are then displayed. This process

filters through all of your current account Contact entries to

only show you the matching entries.

Work fax Home fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback.

Note: These labels entries can change and are dependant on the selected

destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google

destination type).

– or –

7. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on

the right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through

the list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts

list. Touch the contact entry.

Editing Contact Information

1. From the Home screen, tap

CONTACTS

(Contacts).

2. Tap a contact name from the list.

3. Touch and hold the name entry and select Edit

Note: You can also access an entry’s context menu by tapping an entry,

pressing and then selecting Edit

Tabs

Contacts

field

Create

Contact

4. Edit the contact information then tap Save.

Tabbed

Navigation

Contacts

Context

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding a Number to an Existing Contact

4. Enter additional information such as: Email

Instant msg RINGTONE POSTAL ADDRESS ORGANIZATION

or MORE fields to input additional category information.

Google Talk,

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

2. Touch and hold an entry

and select Edit to reveal

the Contact entry’s

•

Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields

and categories.

5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.

details screen (page 89).

Deleting Contacts

3. Touch a phone number

field and enter a phone

number.

This option allows you to delete your contacts. You can delete all

your entries from your phone’s memory, your SIM card, FDN, or

All.

•

Tap

on the

QWERTY keyboard to

remove a previously

entered phone number.

Important!: Once Contacts List entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select

Delete ➔ OK

•

Tap

additional phone number

Tap to remove a

previously entered phone number.

to enter an

Contact Details Screen

Contact List Options

1. From the Home screen, tap

CONTACTS

(Contacts).

2. Press

. The following options display:

• Create contact: allows you to create a new Contact entry.

• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Display options: You can choose to only display contacts that have

phone numbers, sort by first or last name, display contacts first

name first or last name first, display contacts stored to your SIM

card, display contacts stored on your phone, and/or display

contacts stored to other accounts.

Contact Menu Options

1. From the Home screen, tap

CONTACTS

2. Touch and hold an entry to

reveal the context menu.

The following options

display:

• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the SIM card

or microSD card.

• Get friends: allows you to get contacts from your friends on

Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also get contacts from

Corporate or Google accounts.

• Edit: allows you to edit the

currently selected Contacts

entry.

• More

–

Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on

Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also add Corporate or Google

accounts.

• Delete: allows you to delete the

currently selected Contacts

entry.

–

Speed dial: allows you to set up speed-dialing.

Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google account.

Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.

• Join contact: allows you to link

the current contact to another current contact. Similar to a “see

also” feature. If you can’t remember a contact’s information, linking

entries can help you find the person you are looking for.

My profile: allows you to set up a profile for yourself. The information

will be the same that you can add for a new contact.

• Send contact information: allows you to send the current entry

info via text message.

–

Settings: allows you to configure where you save new contacts, or view

your Own numbers, or Service numbers.

• Add to favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to

the list within the Favorites tab.

• Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current Contacts

entry from the Favorites tab.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an

existing group.

Joining Contact Information

Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social

networking logins, and other similar account information. For

example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a

corporate email account login because they are maintained

separately and for different groups of people.

• Mark as default: allows you to assign default numbers, email, etc..

for a selected Contact. For more information, refer to “Marking a

Contact as Default” on page 91.

• Send namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s

information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth

(Exchange or Internet), Gmail, or Universal Composer.

This device can synchronize with multiple accounts (such as

Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange Google, or

T-Mobile). When you synchronize your phone with those

accounts, each account creates a separate contact entry in the

Contacts list.

Contact Entry Options

1. From the Home screen, tap

CONTACTS

2. Tap an entry to reveal the

Contact entry’s Overview

Screen. This screen contains

Name, contact numbers,

email, and linked contact

information.

If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account

that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account

under her maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat

account, when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list

you can join all of her entries and view the information in one

record.

Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You

can select any account email address or information all from one

screen, versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate

the desired account information.

3. Press

to reveal the

context menu specific to this

entry.

Contact Overview Screen

4. Tap an available option.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any

updates contacts make to email account names, email

addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list.

Important!: It is the second contact image that is displayed for both buy the

first contact’s name that is used.

For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie (second

entry). Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains. Tap the

Amy entry (showing the Julie image) to view both.

For more information about synchronizing accounts, see “Get

Friends” on page 94.

5. Touch the main linked contact to view the contact

information you linked. The contacts and information

displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate

what type of account information is contained in the entry.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another

entry).

Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account

Unjoining a Contact

1. From the Home screen, tap

information.

CONTACTS

3. Press

and then tap Join contact.

2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you

4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link).

The second contact is now linked with the first and the

account information is merged into one screen.

want to unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.

Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account

information.

Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one

3. Tap the Joined contacts area.

record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.

4. Tap

next to the entry you want to unjoin. The

contacts are “unjoined” or separated and no longer display

in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go back to

being separately displayed.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Marking a Contact as Default

Sending a Namecard

When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other

messaging type applications, the application needs to know

which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For

example, when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three

phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the

“default” number or entry.

A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to

recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using

Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap a Contact entry.

3. Press

and then tap Send via and select a delivery

Email, Gmail, or Universal Composer

The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to

use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple

entries for the same person (see Linked contacts).

method: Bluetooth

The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and

is delivered when you send the message.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap a Contact entry.

Sending All Current Namecards

3. Press

and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as

Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send

all of your current entries at once.

default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact

name, phone number, or other contact information.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press

via

4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want

and then tap Import/Export

➔

Send namecard

to be the primary information (such as name, phone

number, or email) and select Save

3. Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently

displayed Contact entries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap Send and select a delivery method:

Copying Contact Information

• Bluetooth to transmit this contact to another bluetooth-compatible

Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card

device.

The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your

Contacts list is your phone’s built-in memory. This procedure

allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone’s memory, onto

the SIM card.

• Emailto attach the contact card to a new outgoing email (Exchange

or Internet).

• Gmail to attach the contact card to a new outgoing Internet-based

email.

• Universal Composer to attach the contact card to a new outgoing

text message.

Note: These must be contacts stored on the phone. External entries (Google,

Exchange, etc...) can not be transferred in this manner.

Sending a namecard using Bluetooth

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a

recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on

page 83.

2. From the Contacts List, press

and then tap

Import/Export

➔

Export to SIM card.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

3. Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries.

– or –

2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context

menu.

Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark

indicates a selection.

3. Tap Send namecard via

➔

Bluetooth.

4. Tap Export. The name and phone number for the selected

Important!: You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.

contact is then copied to the SIM.

4. Touch the Bluetooth device in which to send this name

card. Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card

Synchronizing Contacts

This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the

phone’s memory, onto the SIM card.

Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and

manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote

accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an

active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current

Contact entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. From the Contacts List, press

and then tap

Import/Export

➔

Export to SD card.

With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email

addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your

phone. For more information about syncing existing managed

accounts, see “Accounts and Synchronization” on page 203.

3. Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries.

1. Press

sync

➔

and then tap

➔

Accounts and

2. Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish

to synchronize.

3. Tap

within the adjacent account field to reveal the

account’s synchronization settings screen.

4. To synchronize Contacts, tap Sync Contacts. A check mark

indicates the feature is enabled.

Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes. If

after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated, repeat step 2-3.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact

• Choose contacts to display allows you to filter Contacts based on

category entries from within the locations such as: Phone SIM

T-Mobile Contacts Backup Google, and Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync

information.

Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and

3. Tap Done

Corporate accounts via the device.

Get Friends

Display Options

When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,

MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Get

Friends option synchronizes the data from the selected account

type with your Contacts list.

The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose

whether to display contacts saved from the Phone, SIM, T-Mobile

Contacts Backup, external source, or all. You can also choose to

display only contacts that have phone numbers.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press

Add account

(

Contacts).

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press

the following options:

(Contacts).

and then tap Get friends

➔

Add account

➔

and then tap Display options. Configure any of

3. Determine which type of account information you want to

synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:

• Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those

contacts containing phone numbers.

Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync,

• Sort by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted: First

name or Last name

Google

Backup

4. Tap an account type to add.

Facebook, Video Chat, Twitter, or T-Mobile Contacts

• Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are

listed: First name first (ex: Steve Smith) or Last name first (Smith,

Steve).

5. Follow the prompts. The selected account type

synchronizes with your Contacts list.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact

information. For more information, refer to “Joining

Contact Information” on page 89.

4. Tap Next and enter your Facebook account’s Email and

Password information.

5. Tap Log in to begin the synchronization process.

To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:

6. Select a sync interval (None or Once a day) and tap Next

You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as

pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list.

All of their current contact information is then migrated over to

your phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly

different name, separate entries are created and can later be

linked (joined) together into a single entry.

7. Tap those setting you wish to synchronize (all are enabled

by default). A check mark indicates the feature is enabled.

•

Choose from: Select Contacts to Sync

Sync all contacts, or

Sync Calendar

8. Tap Done to save these settings and return to Accounts and

sync screen.

Important!: This process not only synchronizes your contact information but

CONTACTS

9. Tap

to confirm your Facebook contacts are

also your status, events, and more.

now synchronized and appear in your Contacts list.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

To resync Social Network Contacts:

2. From the Contact’s tab, press

and then tap Get

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

friends

➔

Add account.

2. From the Contact’s tab, press

and then tap Sync SNS

3. Tap Facebook from the Integrated contact accounts section

data

of the Add an account screen.

•

This process adds your Facebook account to the list of managed

and synchronized accounts. In this case, your Facebook contacts

are synchronized with your phone’s Contacts list.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

My Profile

Additional Contact Options

You can send this Virtual Business Card (V-card) to other contacts

as an attachment. My Profile is the first Contact listed in the

Contacts list.

Sending an Email to a Contact

Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can

use the Send email feature.

Note: As with any profile, your profile can be associated with a group.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap More

contain an email address display.

(Contacts).

To create My Profile:

➔

Send email. Contacts that

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap More

(Contacts).

➔

My profile.

3. Tap the contact to which you want to send an email. A

check mark displays next to the selection.

3. Enter information into the various fields.

4. Tap Save to store the new entry.

To edit My Profile:

Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen.

4. Tap Add

1. With My profile displayed, press

2. Modify any of the information contained in My Profile, then

touch Save

and then tap Edit.

5. Select an email account type.

6. Compose the email and tap Send

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Export/Import

Groups

For more information, refer to “Copying Contact Information” on

page 92.

This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call

group. This group can be one of the already present groups

(Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.

Contact List Settings

Creating a New Caller Group

From this menu you can determine the default storage location

for Contacts, display you phone’s primary number, and view

service numbers listed in your Contact list.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

GROUPS tab.

2. Press

and then tap Create group

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap More

3. Select one of the following options:

• Save new contacts to: defines the default storage location of new

(Contacts).

3. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to

enter a new group name. For more information, refer to

“Text Input Methods” on page 69.

➔

Settings.

4. Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.

Contacts. Choose from: Always ask Phone SIM T-Mobile

Selections are: Default ringtone Sound, or Phone Ringtone.

Contacts Backup Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

5. Tap Save to store the newly created group

• Own numbers: displays the number for this device.

• Service numbers: displays the list of Service Dialing Numbers

(SDN) assigned by your service provider. These numbers include

emergency numbers, customer service numbers and directory

inquiries.

Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

GROUPS tab.

2. Tap a group entry ➔

(Add member).

3. From the list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want to

add. A checkmark displays next to contact entry.

4. Tap Add. The selected contacts are added to the group.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing an Entry From a Caller Group

Sending a Message to a Group

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

GROUPS tab.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

GROUPS tab.

2. Touch a group entry.

2. Tap an existing group,

and press

and then

3. Press

and then tap Remove member.

tap Send message

4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group.

3. Select the recipients of

the new message

A checkmark displays next to contact entry.

5. Tap Remove.The contacts are removed from the group.

(indicated by a check

mark). If an entry

Editing a Caller Group

To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part

of the selected group.

contains multiple phone

numbers, each must be

selected individually.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

GROUPS tab.

2. Touch a group entry.

4. Tap Send

5. Type your message, and

tap Send

3. Press

and then tap Edit group.

4. Make modifications to the Group name or Ringtone fields.

For more information, refer to “Creating a New Caller

Group” on page 97.

5. Tap Save

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The History Tab

The Updates Tab

The HISTORY tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been

received, missed, and returned. For more information, refer to

“Call Logs Tab” on page 65.

From the UPDATES tab you can view updated contact information

that were synchronized with Facebook, Myspace, or Twitter.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

Note: You must log in to an SNS account (Facebook, Myspace or Twitter)

2. Tap the HISTORY tab.

before you can view the Updates.

3. Press

. The following options are available:

2. Tap the UPDATES tab. The updates display.

• Delete: allows you to delete calls or messages from History. Select

a call or message and tap Delete

• Viewby: allows you to select the type of displayed calls, messages,

or emails. Selections are: Call, Message, Email, Facebook,

MySpace, Twitter, or Select all. Touch the items you want to display

then tap Done

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 7: Messages

This section describes how to send or receive different types of

messages. It also explains the features and functionality

associated with messaging.

emoticons, audio, media and much more (page 101). To use this

feature, you may need to subscribe to your service provider’s

message service.

Types of Messages

Your phone provides the following message types via the

Universal Composer:

The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and

receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio

messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.

To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service

provider’s multimedia message service.

•

Text Messages

Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages

Email and Gmail Messages

Group Texting

Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a

video clip to a text message changes the message from a text

message to a multimedia message.

Google Talk

Message Icons on the Status Bar

Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and

indicate when messages are received and their type. For more

information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 24.

Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display

when new messages are received. For more information, refer to

“Status Bar” on page 24.

1. From the Home screen, tap

new message

(Messaging) ➔ Create

Creating and Sending Messages via Universal

Composer

The Universal Composer is a messaging feature that lets you

send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones

or email addresses. This feature does much more than just send

and receive text, but incorporate other features such as

2. Tap on the To field to manually enter a recipient or tap

to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid

entries must have a wireless phone number or email

address).

Messages

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Add. The

•

Attach other (

): allows you insert the following: Audio clip,

Record audio, Quick phrase, Calendar, Contacts, or Memo.

contact displays in the recipient field.

–

Audio clip: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the

Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping OK

Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record an

4. Tap the text field and use either the on-screen keypad or

QWERTY keyboard to enter a message. For more

information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 69.

audio clip using the phone’s microphone, then add it to your message

by tapping

➔

Add.

5. Add more recipients by tapping

and select more

–

Quick phrase: allows you to select from a list of preset text phrases

for insertion.

Calendar: allows you to tap on an existing Calendar event and add it

to your message.

recipients.

6. Review your message and tap

(Send).

SEND

Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry to

add their contact info to your message.

Note: If you exit a message before you tap send the message automatically

saves as a draft.

Memo: allows you to tap on an existing Memo and add it to your

message.

Message Options

1. From the Home screen, tap

•

Emoticons (

from for insertion into your current message.

): provides a series of emoticon icons to choose

(Messaging).

2. From within a new or open message, tap one of the

Insert Geotagging Information (

information regarding your current location into your outgoing

message.

): allows you to embed

onscreen icons to access message options such as:

•

Social Media and Email Options (

Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, and Social Status Update Composer.

Insert Image/Video ( ): allows you to choose an image of

video from your Gallery to inert into your current message.

): includes email,

– or –

•

From within a new message press

additional messaging options:

to display

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Secret message: allows you to enter a password to lock this

message and secure it from unsecured access. Recipient will need

to have the password to open the message.

• More: displays additional message options such as: Secret

Message, Clear all stickies, Add subject, Add to contacts, View

contact, or Add text.

• Add/Remove subject: inserts or deletes a Subject field in your

Viewing Newly Received Messages

When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by

message.

• Add text: allows you to add text items from sources such as:

Contacts, Calendar, and Memo.

displaying

within the Notification area at the top left of

your Home screen.

• Settings: provides access to additional Composer display options.

Activating these options provides access to features such as: Text

message, Email, Facebook direct message, Twitter direct message,

MySpace direct message, Status Update.

To read a message:

1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For

more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 27.

– or –

From within an open message press

additional messaging options:

to display

From the Home screen, tap

(Messaging) then tap the

new message to view. The selected message displays on

the screen.

• Call [recipient]: dials the senders number.

• Delete: erases the current message.

2. Tap

to play a multimedia message.

• View stickies: allows you to view any sticky messages in the

present message thread.

3. In a single motion, touch and scroll up or down the page to

scroll through the message (if additional pages were

added).

• Search: searches through the current message thread for a

keyword.

• Show attachment gallery: displays the any current images

attached within the message thread. Shows a gallery of all images

attached throughout the current thread.

Messages

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Message Threads

4. Tap SEND to reply.

– or –

Sent and received text/picture messages are grouped into

message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see all the

messages exchanged between parties and displays a contact on

the screen. Message threads are listed in the order in which they

were received, with the latest message displayed at the top.

Press

messaging options: Call [contact]

Search Show Attachment Gallery, or More (Secret Message,

and then tap Send after selecting one of these

Delete View stickies

Clear all stickies, Add to contacts, Add subject, View

contact, or Add text).

To reply to a text message:

Current Recipient

My Text

1. From the Home screen,

To access message thread options:

tap

(Messaging).

ᮣ

From the main Text - All Messages screen, touch and hold

the message to display the following options:

2. Select the message and

while open, tap the Enter

message here field and

then type your reply

message.

• Reply allows you to create a new bubble as a reply to the external

recipient.

• Delete thread: deletes the entire text message thread.

• Add ##### to Contacts: adds the current caller to your Contacts

list.

3. Compose your reply.

Your texts are colored

dark Blue and your

caller’s reply’s are Light

Blue.

• Block/Unblock contact: either prevents your phone from

receiving text messages from the selected contact (name or

number) or allows the receipt of their new incoming messages.

Reply Bubble

Function Options

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To access additional Bubble options:

Deleting multiple messages

ᮣ

Touch and hold the message bubble to display the

following options:

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Messaging).

2. Press

and then tap Delete.

• Delete: deletes the currently selected message bubble from the

3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark

thread.

displays beside each selected message.

• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message

bubble to an external recipient.

4. Tap Delete

• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble

from the thread.

5. At the prompt, tap Yes to delete or No to end the process.

Message Search

You can search through your messages by using the Message

Search feature.

• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as a

single text message within the SIM card.

• View message details: displays details for the currently selected

message bubble.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap Search

3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in

which to search, then tap

Deleting Messages

Deleting a single message

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Messaging).

2. From the ALL MESSAGES list, touch and hold a message,

then select Delete thread

3. At the prompt, tap Yes to delete or No to cancel.

4. All messages that contain the entered search string

display.

Messages

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multimedia message (MMS) settings

Messaging Settings

• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs

To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia

messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.

you whether or not your message was delivered.

• Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone receives a

request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap Settings

• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve

messages.

The following Messaging settings are available:

• Roaming auto-retrieve: allows the message system to

automatically retrieve while roaming.

Storage settings

• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is

reached, rather than overwriting them.

• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,

Restricted, or Warning.

• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text

messages are allowed in one conversation.

–

Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content

belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.

• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many

multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.

Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are

creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content

Domain.

Text message (SMS) settings

–

Free: you may add any content to the message.

• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs

you whether or not your message was delivered.

Notification settings

• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the

messages stored on the SIM card.

• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your

status bar.

• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your message

center where your messages reside while the system is attempting

to deliver them.

• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message

notifications.

• Reply path: allows you to set the reply path for each message you

send messages.

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Common settings

Group Texting

This service allows you to text a multiple number of contacts

simultaneously.

• Block list: allows you to configure a block list for incoming

messages from assigned parties. Similar to call blocking but for

incoming messages.

–

Tap Select all to choose all recent recipients or place a checkmark

alongside those desired parties.

Note: To receive certain group text messages, it might be necessary to

disable the Notification pop-up feature. When enabled, notifications

are not displayed. For more information, refer to “Notification Pop-up”

on page 206.

–

Tap Done to update the block list entries.

Auto-Reply settings

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Read the terms of service and tap Accept

3. Enter your first and last name and tap OK

(Group Texting).

Enables you to set up an “away from my phone” text message

that goes out to all incoming recipients not on the block list.

Similar to an “Out Of Office message” message for email.

1. Tap Enable Auto-reply to activate the feature.

4. Click the on-screen photo icon to update your Group text

image and then tap OK. By clicking OK, you are publically

sharing your name. Your phone is then provisioned for

group SMS texting.

2. Edit the Start time & date and End time & date fields to

regulate when the feature is active.

3. Tap Auto-reply (Tap to edit) to create the new “away from

my phone” outgoing text message.

To create a new group:

4. Tap OK to store the new message.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Group Texting).

2. Tap Create New Group to create a new text group.

Messages

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Select entries from your

available Contacts to add

members to your new

group.

3. Tap Compose to open the text entry field and use either the

on-screen keypad or QWERTY keyboard to enter a

message. For more information, refer to “Text Input

Methods” on page 69.

•

Tap

(Add Contact)

4. Review your message and tap

(Send).

to manually add contacts by

entering a Name and

Cloud Texting

This feature enables you to text from the Web, your laptop, or

tablet even if your no where near your phone.

Phone Number. Tap OK to

store the new entry.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Cloud Texting).

2. Write down the cloud texting website.

(Applications) ➔

•

Tap the Type to search

contacts field to search

through your current list of

available contact numbers.

(

3. Enter the Web address into your computer browser’s

4. Tap Save, enter a name for the new group, and then tap OK

address bar and follow the onscreen instructions to:

to store the newly created group and its members.

•

Create an account

To send a new group text message:

Create your Contacts

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Group Texting).

Text your available contacts (as if you were doing it from your

phone)

2. Tap an available group from list within the Group Texting

screen. This populates the To field with those members

from the currently selected group.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating an Internet Email Account

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email

using several email services. You can also receive text message

alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email

application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts

simultaneously in one convenient location.

(

Email). If you already have email accounts, your

accounts screen is displayed

2. Enter you email address in the Email address field. The

phone will try to resolve

There are currently three main types of email accounts on your

phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (Corporate email or Outlook ).

3. Enter your password in the Password field, tap Next

➔

To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet

Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to

access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private

Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account.

•

Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually

(POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the

information specific to your email provider.

•

The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from

other email accounts accessed by your device.

•

IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently

used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current

standard.

4. Tap Next at the Your accounts screen.

•

POP (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs

(Internet service providers) and common among consumer

applications. POP3 is the current standard.

Note: The Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account type is used to configure

an Outlook/Corporate email account. For more information, refer to

“Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account” on page 111.

5. At the prompt name the account and enter a screen name

to identify yourself on this account. If you have already

setup this account, skip to step 6.

Messages

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You

can also view Personal information for this account,

Receipts (if you setup the account to return receipts),

Travel information, and more (if available).

Composing Email

1. From the Home screen, tap

APPS

(Applications) ➔

(Email).

2. Press

and then tap Accounts

7. Tap Done to store the new account.

3. Select an email account.

4. Tap Inbox and press

Important!: Only some “Plus” accounts include POP access allowing this

program to connect. If you are not able to sign in with your

correct email address and password, you may not have a paid

“Plus” account. Launch the Web browser to access your

account.

5. Tap Compose

6. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.

•

If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate

the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message

recipients as you want.

Opening an Email

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Email).

and then tap Accounts

(Applications) ➔

7. Tap the Cc/Bcc field to carbon copy or blind copy

(

recipients.

2. Press

8. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.

3. Select an email account and tap an email message.

9. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.

Refreshing Email messages

•

To add an attachment, tap

screen) and make a selection.

(Attach) (from the bottom of the

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Email).

2. Select an email account.

3. Press and then tap Refresh

(Applications) ➔

(

10. Once complete, tap SEND

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring Email Settings

1. From the Home screen, tap

• Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is

received.

APPS

(Applications) ➔

• Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such

as username, password, and IMAP server.

(Email).

2. Press

and then tap Accounts

• Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing settings, such as

username, password, and SMTP server.

3. Select an account.

• Recent messages: Lets you assign the number of recent

messages that are displayed on-screen. Choose from: 25 - Total.

4. From the email list screen, press

and then tap More

➔

Account settings

• Forward with files: Lets you include attachments when forwarding

an email.

5. Alter any of the following settings:

• Add signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the

bottom of all outgoing emails.

• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display

name.

• Signature: Lets you create an email signature for your outgoing

Gmail email messages.

• Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your

outgoing email messages.

Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)

• Email check frequency: Tap to adjust the time interval used by

your device to check your email account for new email messages.

Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook

Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft

Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email

application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and

Calendar information directly with your company’s Exchange

server.

• Default account: Assign this account as the default email account

used for outgoing messages.

• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to appear

within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new Internet

mail (Gmail, etc..) is received.

• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email

message is received.

Messages

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account

5. Enter a Domain, and confirm your Username, and Password

information and tap Next

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Email).

2. If you already have other email account setup:

(Applications) ➔

(

•

If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Accept all SSL

certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this

additional level.

•

Press

and then tap Accounts

Important!: If your exchange server requires this feature, leaving this field

and then tap Add account

unchecked can prevent connection.

– or –

6. If prompted with a connection error, manually enter your

Enter your Email address and Password information, and

then tap Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for

further details and support.

Exchange server information within the appropriate field.

• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address.

Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from

your company network administrator. Do not accept the default

entry as this is a guess based on returned information.

• Email address: your Outlook work email address.

• Password: typically your network access password (case-

7. With the new server information entered, tap Next

8. Read the on-screen activation disclaimer and, if prompted,

tap OK

9. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap

10. Identify your new account with a unique name and provide

the outgoing name text then tap Done

sensitive).

3. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new

email account screen).

4. When prompted to provide additional detailed information,

scroll down the screen and tap Next

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Opening an Exchange Email

5. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

•

If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate

the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message

recipients as you want.

(Email).

2. Press

and then tap Accounts

6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.

3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email

7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.

message.

•

To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the

screen) and make a selection.

Refreshing Exchange Email

•

Tap the file you wish to attach and tap OK

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Email).

2. Select an exchange email account.

(

Applications) ➔

8. Once complete, tap Send

(

Deleting an Exchange Email Message

ᮣ

Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select

Delete from the on-screen context menu.

– or –

3. Press

and then tap Refresh

Composing Exchange Email

1. From the Home screen, tap

APPS

(

Applications) ➔

With the email message displayed, press

tap Delete

and then

(

Email).

and then tap Accounts

3. Select an exchange email account.

4. Tap Inbox and press and then tap Compose

2. Press

Messages

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings

• Out of Office Settings assigns this account’s out of office settings.

• Empty server trash: allows you to delete your email account’s

1. Press

➔

and then tap

➔

Accounts and

trash bin remotely.

sync.

• Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule.

2. Tap

within the Microsoft Exchange account field to

• Email size configures the incoming email size allowed to pass

through to your phone automatically without user interaction. Larger

emails will have to be retrieved manually.

reveal the account’s synchronization settings screen.

3. Toggle either the Sync Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to

force the device to manually resync either the exchange

Contacts or Calendar entries.

• Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon

when new email messages have been received.

• Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or

upcoming event is pending.

– or –

• Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is

Tap Account settings and specify any other email settings

pending.

you wish to synchronize:

• Incoming settings provides access to the Domain, password, and

exchange server settings.

• Account name displays the name used by the device to track the

account.

• SyncContacts synchronizes the contacts between your phone and

the remote exchange server.

• Your name displays the name used in the From field within your

outgoing email messages.

• Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries

between your phone and the remote exchange server.

• Amount to synchronize to assign the sync range for your incoming

and outgoing email messages between your phone and your

external exchange server. How many days worth of email

• Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync

calendar events.

messages should the phone and server synchronize. Choose from:

• Add signature activates the email signature feature.

1 day 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month.

• Signature allows you to create an outgoing email signature

attached to new email messages sent from your phone.

• Default account assigns this account as the default used when

sending out new email messages.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Press

to return to the previous page.

2. Tap an existing email message.

Using Google Mail

Refreshing Google Mail

Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first

setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the

synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized

with your Gmail account.

ᮣ

From within the Gmail message list, press

tap Refresh to send and receive new emails and

synchronize your email with the Gmail account.

and then

Composing a Gmail Message

1. From the Home screen, tap

Signing into Google Mail

APPS

(Applications) ➔

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gmail).

(Applications) ➔

(Gmail).

(

2. From the Gmail Inbox, press

and then tap Compose

Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features

3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.

such as Google Mail and Android Market.

Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.

2. Tap Next to add a Google account.

3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.

4. Press

and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind

– or –

copy.

Tap Sign in if you have a Google account.

5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.

The Inbox loads conversations and email.

6. Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your

Opening Gmail

message.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gmail).

(Applications) ➔

7. Once complete tap

(Send).

(

Messages

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing a Gmail Message

Google Talk

1. From the Gmail Inbox, touch a message to view. The

following options are available:

Google Talk™ is a free Windows and web-based application for

instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are

automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This

allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail

accounts.

• Archive: archives the selected Email.

• Delete: deletes the Email.

• <: displays older Emails.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Talk).

2. Tap Next to add a Google account.

(Applications) ➔

• >: displays newer Emails.

(

2. Press

options:

to select one of the following additional

3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.

• Change labels: changes the label on the email or conversation.

– or –

• Add/Remove star: click a message's star to add or remove the

star (just like clicking flags in Outlook).

Tap Sign in if you have a Google account. The Inbox loads

• Mark unread: unread messages or threads with unread messages

display in boldface text in the Inbox.

conversations and email.

4. After entering your user name and password, tap the Down

• Go to Inbox: displays the Google Mail Inbox.

Navigation key.

• Mute: mutes the conversation.

• More

5. Tap Sign in

–

Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.

6. Begin using Google Talk.

Select text: allows you to select text to copy and paste.

Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings.

Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This could take up to

5 minutes to complete.

Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help

information.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 8: Multimedia

This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your

phone, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, and how

to manage your photos, images and sounds.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Camera).

2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,

adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.

This section explains how to use the camera on your phone. You

can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in

camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG

format.

3. If desired, before taking the photo, touch the left tab to

access various camera options and settings.

4. You can also touch the screen to move the focus to the

area you touch.

Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.

Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.

Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with

another person’s privacy.

5. Press the Camera key until the shutter sounds. (The picture

is automatically stored within your designated storage

location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored

on the Phone.) For more information, refer to “Camera and

Camcorder Options” on page 117.

Using the Camera

Taking Photos

Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as

choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the

camera key.

Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows

may appear on the photo.

Multimedia

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in

various modes. Once you change the mode, the

corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the

display. Choose from Camera or Camcorder.

3. Shooting Mode: allows you to set the following options:

• Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before returning to the

shooting mode.

• Continuous: takes a succession of consecutive photos by pressing

and holding the Camera key.

• Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and

then adding additional images to itself. The guide box lets you view

the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall

within.

Camera and Camcorder Options

You can change options using your keypad in capture mode.

Camera Options

4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or

The following short cuts are available for the camera:

saving pictures. Selections are: Recent recipient

Phone

Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Touch the screen to display

Book New Email, or New Number

the tab, then touch the tab to view these options.

5. Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on

the subject through the lens sensor while taking a

picture.Touch and drag the slider to the left (to decrease

the value), to the right (to increase the value). You can also

touch the Minus icon (to decrease the value) or the Plus

icon (to increase the value).

1. Front/Rear: allows you to activate either the front facing or

rear camera lenses.

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Quick view: displays the photo for quick viewing.

• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects

to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,

or Sepia.

7. Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in Camera

mode.

• Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or meters

the light source: Centre weighted, Spot, or Matrix.

8. Settings: displays two types of settings, Camera (first tab)

• Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to: Superfine,

Fine, or Normal.

and General settings (second tab).

Camera settings

• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness

for this photo.

• Focus mode: sets the focus mode to: Auto focus or Macro (close

up photos).

General settings

• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly

• Scene mode: to select a camera setting for better image capture

under different lighting environments. Choose from: None (default),

Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,

Sunset, Dawn, Fall color, Firework, Text, Candlelight and Backlight.

set up each shot.

• Review: displays the photo for review. Selections are: On

(checkmark) or Off (no checkmark).

• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camera takes the

photo. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,

2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the

camera takes the photo after the specified time elapses.

• Shutter sound: allows you to select a tone to play when the

camera’s shutter opens and closes. Sound selections are Sound 1,

Sound 2, Sound 3, or Off.

• Reset: resets the camera settings to the default settings.

• Resolution: sets the photo resolution to: 2048x1536, 2048x1232,

1600x1200, 1600x960, 640x480, or 800x480.

• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following

choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.

Multimedia

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Camcorder Options

4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or

saving videos. Selections are: Recent recipient, Phone

Book, New Email, or New Number.

You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. The

following short cuts are available:

5. Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on

the subject through the lens sensor while recording a

video. Touch and drag the slider to the left to decrease the

value, or to the right to increase the value, or touch the

Minus icon to decrease the value, or the Plus icon to

increase the value.

6. Quick view: displays the video for quick viewing.

7. Camera button: records a video when pressed in

Camcorder mode.

1. Camcorder / Camera Mode: allows you to record a video

8. Settings: displays two types of settings, Camcorder (first

various modes. Once you change the mode, the

corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the

display. Choose from Camcorder or Camera.

tab) and General settings (second tab).

2. Recording mode: Normal or Limit for MMS.

3. Resolution: sets the video resolution to: 720x480,

640x480, 320x240, or 176x144.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Camcorder settings

Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options

• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camcorder records

the video. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,

2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the

camcorder records the video after the specified time elapses.

After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various

options.

Photo options

• Share: allows you to share a picture using AllShare, Bluetooth,

Email, Facebook, Gmail, Picasa, Twitter, and Universal Composer.

• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following

choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.

• Set as: sets the photo as a Home screen Wallpaper or Contact icon.

• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects

to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,

or Sepia.

• More

–

Send to: sends this photo to either: Recent log, Contacts, New Email

address, or New Phone number.

• Video quality: allows you to set the video quality to: Superfine, Fine,

or Normal.

Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,

Contacts, New Email address, or New Phone number.

• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness

for this video.

Delete: deletes this photo.

General settings

Video options

• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly

set up each recording.

• Share: allows you to share a video using AllShare, Bluetooth, Email,

Gmail, Universal Composer, or YouTube.

• Audio recording: activates audio recording feature so you can

• Play: plays the current video using the Video Player.

record audio while recording the video.

• More

• Review: set to On to review the recorded video.

–

Send to: sends this video to either: Recent log, Contacts, New Email

address, or New Phone number.

• Reset: resets the camcorder settings to the default settings.

Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,

Contacts, New Email address, or New Phone number.

Delete: deletes this video.

Multimedia

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Camera Gallery Options

Camera Image Options

The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera

images.

When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Photo folder. You

can view your pictures immediately or view them anytime in the

Photo folder.

1. From the Home screen,

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

tap

(

Applications) ➔

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the

Image viewer. Touch and drag a picture to the left to see

the next picture or to the right to see the previous picture.

Gallery).

2. Select a folder location

(ex: Camera) and select

an image by touching

and holding it once to

place a green check

mark on the file.

3. Tap Slideshow to initiate an on-screen slideshow

displaying every image in the current folder.

– or –

Tap Menu to display the following image menu options:

• Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Twitter,

Bluetooth, Gmail, Universal Composer, Picasa, Facebook, and

Email.

3. From this main Gallery

screen to reveal gallery-

specific options Share

• Delete allows you to delete the current image.

Delete, and More

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• More: provides you with the additional options such as:

–

Send to: allows you to send the file to either: Recent log, Contacts,

New Email address, or New Phone number.

–

Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take

after taking an image (Recent log, Contacts, New Email address or

New Phone number).

–

Details: files details such as Title, Type, Date taken, Album, Location,

latitude, Longitude, etc..

Set as: allows you to assign a picture to one of three location: Home

screen Wallpaper or to a Contact’s icon image.

Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current

picture. Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or

Discard to ignore any changes.

–

Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a

counterclockwise direction.

Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a

clockwise direction.

Assigning an Image as a Contact Icon

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(Gallery).

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the

Image viewer.

3. With the image displayed, tap Menu

Contact icon

➔

Set as

➔

Multimedia

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap a contact to make a selection.

5. Crop the image and tap Save

6. Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image.

– or –

Tap Discard to stop without updating the wallpaper image.

Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(Applications) ➔

Using the Camcorder

In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a

camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send high

definition videos.

(

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the

Image viewer.

3. With the image displayed, tap Menu

➔

Set as.

Note: To ensure the Camcorder can record the video, use an SDHC memory

card.

4. Select the available option:

Shooting Video

• Home screen Wallpaper assigns the current image to the home

screen background. This image is spread across all available

screens.

Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is

recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by

having the light source behind you.

5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture.

Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out

to create a cropped area.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(

Camera) ➔ Camcorder to activate the camcorder

mode.

2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,

adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Press the record video key ( ) to begin shooting video.

4. Touch to pause the recording or touch to stop the

2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video

playback.

– or –

recording and save the video file to your Photo folder.

Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to

select the video (green check mark) and display the

following video menu context options:

5. Once the file is saved, tap Play to play your video for

review.

6. Press

to return to the viewer.

• Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Universal

Composer, YouTube, Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email.

Camcorder Options

Camcorder options are represented by icons across both sides of

the screen.

• Delete allows you to delete chosen/selected pictures. Touch the

checkmark, to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to

delete, then touch Delete.

For more information, refer to “Camera and Camcorder Options”

• More: provides you with the additional options such as:

on page 117.

–

Send to: allows you to send the file to either: Recent log, Contacts,

New Email address, or New Phone number.

Accessing Videos

When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder.

You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in

the Camera folder.

–

Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take

after shooting video (Recent log, Contacts, New Email address or

New Phone number).

–

Details: displays video file information.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(Applications) ➔

(

Multimedia

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Opening and Navigating within Files

Amazon MP3

Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by

Amazon.com. Using Amazon MP3 you can download DRM-Free

(digital rights management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.

DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the

device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Files).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Amazon MP3).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your

2. Tap one of the categories to begin browsing the

selected file.

music files.

• Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to download music.

• Home tab allows you to back up to the root directory.

•

Press

displayed on-screen. Choose from: List

Thumbnail

Press

Delete

Bluetooth visibility and Settings).

and then tap View by to change the way the files are

Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please

List and details, or

contact your service provider for further details.

Files

•

for these additional options: Share

Create folder

View by List by, and More (Move, Copy, Rename,

Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,

bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one

convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if

the associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4).

3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to

launch the associated application.

APPS

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Files).

(Applications) ➔

(

Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders,

subfolders, etc.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Gallery

Using the Media Room

The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For

photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a

slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as

a picture message.

The Media Room application plays video files, local music stored on

the SD card, as well as streaming media via Slacker. Slacker offers

free, internet radio for mobile phones.

Playing Videos

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the

Gallery, access Files and remove some of the media files from the

folders, and then open the Gallery.

(

Media Room). A list of videos sorted on the SD card

displays in the Video list.

Opening the Gallery

2. Tap the VIDEO and tap a video file to begin viewing.

APPS

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Playing Music

(Gallery). For more information, refer to “Camera

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Gallery Options” on page 121.

(

Media Room). Music player tips display.

2. Tap the MUSIC tab and select a music category: Playlists

Artists, Albums Songs, Genres, or Rated

Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage card,

Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top left album

contains all the pictures in the storage card.

3. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.

Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is

connected through the earphone port only.

Multimedia

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Slacker Radio

1. From the Home screen, tap

songs play in order and are not shuffled.

APPS

(Applications) ➔

(

Media Room).

2. Tap the SLACKER tab and select a radio station category:

Favorites Recently Played, Custom Stations Slacker

Spotlight, Top Stations, or Slacker Stations

Music Player Options

The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for

the music player such as whether you want the music to play in

the background, sound effects, and how the music menu

displays.

3. Scroll through the on-screen list and tap an entry to begin

ᮣ

With the music player application displayed, press

and select one of the following options:

playback.

4. The following Music Player controls are available:

Pause the song.

• Add to playlist: adds the selected music file to a quick playlist.

• Share: shares a music file via AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or

Universal Composer.

Start the song after pausing.

• Media Share: shares a current song to other devices via AllShare.

• Add as ringtone: sets this song as a Phone ringtone.

Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to

previous song.

• Media Home: takes you back to the main Media Home screen.

Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go

to next song.

Using Playlists

Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.

These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this

device, or using a third-party application (such as Windows

Media Player) and downloading those files to an SD card inserted

into the device.

Plays the entire song list once.

Repeats the currently playing song.

ALL

Replays the current list when the list ends.

shuffles the current list of songs randomly.

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing Music from a Playlist

1. From the Home screen, tap

Creating a Playlist

1. From the Home screen, tap

APPS

(Applications) ➔

(

Media Room). Music player tips display.

2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Playlists

3. Press Add a playlist

4. Select from your available songs.

5. Tap Add Create new playlist

(

Media Room). Music player tips display.

2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Playlists

➔

3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.

4. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context

menu.

➔

5. Tap Remove from playlist.

6. Enter a new playlist title, then tap Save

Editing a Playlist

Adding Music to a Playlist

Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can

also share, delete, or rename the playlist.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(

Media Room). Music player tips display.

Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default

playlists can not be renamed.

2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Playlists

➔

Add to playlist.

3. Tap the song and tap Add

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(

Media Room). Music player tips display.

Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song name

from the main screen to open the context menu. Select Add to playlist

2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Playlists

3. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen

4. Select the existing playlist or tap Create new playlist

context menu.

4. Tap Rename

Multimedia

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap Save

Media Hub

Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and

TV content. With hundreds of titles available, entertaining your

family on the go was never easier. You can rent or purchase your

favorite content and watch from any location. Featuring the

stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media

Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you've never

experienced it before.

Transferring Music Files

Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two

methods:

1. Downloaded to the phone from or Android Market.

Music files are directly stored on your phone.

2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.

Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.

Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.

For more information, refer to “USB Settings” on page 201.

Removing Music Files

1. From the Home screen, tap

Important!: You must be using an active Wi-Fi connection to preview and

download a media file.

APPS

(Applications) ➔

You must have a microSD card installed prior to initiating the

service. This card acts as a storage location for your downloaded

rental or purchase.

(

Media Room). Music player tips display.

2. Tap the MUSIC tab ➔ Songs

Important!: Before using this service, you must be connected to an active

3. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen

Wi-Fi connection.

context menu.

4. Tap Delete

➔

Delete. The music file(s) is deleted.

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a New Media Hub Account

• What’s new: shows recently added media that is available for rent

or purchase.

Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an

account. Enter the required information.

• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have

purchased or rented. Touch a media entry to view it.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

MediaHub).

and tap My Account

(Applications) ➔

• Movie Store: displays movies that are available for rent or

purchase. Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the

screen. Touch a category and movies of that type display.

(

2. Press

• TV Store: displays TV shows that are available for purchase. Scroll

through the movie categories at the top of the screen. Touch a

category and TV shows of that type display.

3. Tap Create Account and enter the required information.

4. Accept the Terms and Conditions by placing a checkmark

4. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you

in the adjacent field.

would like to purchase or rent.

5. Tap Create Account

6. From the My Account screen, you can edit parameters

such as: My Details My Purchases My Payment Methods

Manage My Devices

Using Media Hub

5. Tap WATCH PREVIEW to watch a short preview or tap Rent

or Own

6. Choose a payment method and then follow the on-screen

Logout, or Reset Media Hub

instructions. The media stores to the My Media folder.

Media Hub Notices

Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you

create an account in Media Hub.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

•

(MediaHub).

2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap

•

Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up

to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same

account.

Accept to continue or Decline to exit.

3. At the Media Hub screen select one of the following

options:

Multimedia

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than

once every 30 days.

•

In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of

more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after

the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing

rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction,

but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content

may not be available for the entire twenty-four (24) consecutive

hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond

the thirty (30) day rental window).

You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you’d

like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a

later point in time subject to content re-download availability and

studio permissions.

•

You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have

acquired through the Service.

•

You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub

through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.

•

You must have Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content.

Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be

viewable on only 1 device in your account.

T-Mobile TV

T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and

Video on Demand. This service can incur additional charges,

please contact your customer service representative or visit us

on the Web

•

Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.

Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks

where there is a weak signal.

•

You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)

license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media

Content has been buffered.

Note: If you are unable to attain a connection to this service, it is

recommended you turn off your Wi-Fi connection.

You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive

hours of start of playback.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(

T-Mobile TV). The T-Mobile Terms and Conditions

•

Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not

extend the available viewing time.

page displays.

Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please

contact your service provider for further details.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or

touch Exit

YouTube

YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload

and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.

Note: T-Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be

used. During this initial registration process, any current Wi-Fi

connections must be disabled.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

YouTube).

2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or

touch Decline

(Applications) ➔

(

3. Tap Disable Wi-Fi if you currently have an active Wi-Fi

connection.

3. When the screen loads you can begin searching and

4. Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30-day trial of the service.

viewing posted videos.

5. Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing:

4. Press

➔

Settings

➔

High quality on mobile if you

Live TV

On Demand, My Media, More Info, Browse, or Live

prefer high quality output.

Channels

Multimedia

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 9: Applications and Development

Thissectionoutlinesthevariousapplicationsthatareavailableon

your phone.

Accounts and Sync

This application allows you to configure general synchronization

settings that determine whether the background data is

synchronized, and whether you automatically synchronize data

with the phone.

Applications

The Applications list provides quick access to all the available

applications on the phone.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Accounts & Sync).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Refer to the application table on page 37 for a description of each

Application, its function, and how to navigate through that

particular application. If the application is already described in

another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to

that particular section is provided.

(

For more information, refer to “Accounts and Synchronization”

on page 203.

Alarm & Clocks

Here you can set an alarm, configure and view the World clock,

use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The applications display in a

tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger.

For more information, refer to “Alarm and Clocks” on page 178.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Alarm & Clocks).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Play file from server on my phone allows you to receive and

playback media stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on

your device.

AllShare

This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile

phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on

who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen

monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.

• Play file from server on another player via my phone allows you

to “piggy-back” content playback on an external Wi-Fi TV/receiver.

Your phone retrieves content from an external wireless source (eg.,

server) and pushes it through to an external wireless destination

(eg., TV). The phone acts to both route the media and control its

playback (as a remote).

Allows users to share their in-device media content with other

external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network

Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNA-

compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital

multimedia streamer.

Configuring AllShare Settings

The AllShare™ application must first be configured prior to its

initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-FI,

Items to share, source server address, and external device

acceptance rights.

Important!: You must activate Wi-Fi to use this application. For more

information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on page 181.

1. From the Home screen, tap

AllShare).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

AllShare).

2. Follow the on-screen prompts.

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

2. Tap Settings and configure the following settings as

desired:

The application contains three separate streaming media

options:

• Media server name allows you to enter the name of the server

transmitting the media files. ex., MyServer. Once you enter the

name tap Save.

• Play file from my phone on another player allows you to play

local device content on a Wi-Fi capable TV or playback device. The

phone can then be used as a remote to control playback.

• Share media allows you to configure which media types will be

shared. Choose from Share video, Share audio, or Share picture.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

134

• Access point network allows you to turn on your Wi-Fi

functionality and connect to an available Wi-Fi Access Point.

Receiving Media via AllShare

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

APPS

• Upload from other devices allows you to setup an acceptance rule

of incoming media from other external devices. Choose from

Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject and tap OK.

(

AllShare).

adjacent to Play file from server on my phone

2. Tap

3. Press

to return to the previous page.

(This procedure assumes selection of the second option.)

Transmitting Media via AllShare

3. Tap a source media server from the on-screen list. If you

1. From the Home screen, tap

AllShare).

adjacent to Play file from phone on another player

(

Applications) ➔

server does not appear, tap Refresh.

APPS

(

PlayingFilesfromaServertoAnotherdeviceviathePhone

Applications) ➔

2. Tap

1. From the Home screen, tap

AllShare).

adjacent to the Play file from server on another

(

APPS

via my phone. (This procedure assumes selection of the

(

first option).

2. Tap

3. If transmitting local media to an external device, scroll

through your microSD card folders to locate the file(s) you

wish to transmit. A check mark indicates the file has been

selected.

player via my phone. (This procedure uses the phone as a

bridge between your server and another AllShare-capable

device).

3. Tap a source media server from the on-screen list. If your

4. Tap Add to playlist. Your phone then begins to search for

source does not appear, tap Refresh

compatible Wi-Fi devices.

4. Search for the media files you wish to add to a playlist.

Once the files are selected, tap Add to playlist. Complete

this step for all media (Videos, Audio, Pictures).

5. Tap a destination device from the on-screen list. If you

desired device does not appear, tap Refresh

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Select an available device on which to play the selected

AppPack

media files.

Installs the T-Mobile AppPack that allows you to discover those

applications that are compatible specifically with your phone.

6. Follow the remaining on-screen instructions.

1. From the Home screen, tap

AppPack).

2. Read the terms and conditions and tap OK

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Amazon MP3

(

Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by

Amazon.com. Using you can download DRM-Free (digital rights

management) MP3 formatted songs and albums. For more

information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on page 125.

3. Activate your currently bundle software by tapping an

on-screen selection.

– or –

1. From the Home screen, tap

Amazon MP3).

2. Select an on-screen category (Bestselling Albums

Bestselling Songs Browse By Genre, or Search).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

Tap Manage Applications to be taken to the All tab within

the Manage Applications menu. For more information,

refer to “Managing Applications” on page 199.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to locate the desired

Books

track or album.

Use Google Books to read over 3 million ebooks on the go.

4. Tap the song title to listen to an audio preview. Tap the

Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Google Books: jump

right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks.

Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading where you

left off on your phone or computer, and settle down with a great

book on your Android phone!

song title again to stop playback.

• Preview allows you to play an audio clip of the selected song.

5. Once you have located a desired song title or album, tap

[price]

➔

Buy.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Books).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

•

Pressing BUY allows you to purchase the song and download it to

your device’s microSD card.

(

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

136

2. Tap Get eBooks to begin searching for both free and paid

Calendar

ebooks.

With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,

week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a

reminder. Google Calendar is built into the phone and

synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone

and your online Google account.

Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook to

your phone.

Calculator

Using this feature you can use the phone as a calculator. The

calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,

subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as

a scientific calculator.

Important!: You must have previously added an account (Facebook, Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the Calendar.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Applications) ➔

APPS

(

Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:

1. From the Home screen, tap

Calculator).

(

Applications) ➔

10 1112

APPS

141516171819

(

• Month: displays the Month view.

• Week: displays the Week view.

• Day: displays the Day view.

2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.

3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the

• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,

Plus, Minus, Multiplication, or Division key.

or Day, or you can look for events for a future date.

4. Enter the next number.

5. To view the result, tap the

(equals) key.

6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.

Note: Place the screen in Landscape mode (sliding screen open) to reveal

additional scientific functions.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Press

and select one of the following options:

4. Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization of

calendar events between your device and the remote

exchange server. A check mark indicates the feature is

enabled.

• Search: allows you to search within current events.

• Create: creates a new Event.

• Go to: displays a specific date.

• Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting

the date.

Call logs

The Call log lists all the calls missed, received, or dialed.

For more information, refer to “Call Logs Tab” on page 65.

Contacts

The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your

Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.

• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or

an individual event.

• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.

For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts” on

page 93.

To manually sync calendar events:

For more information, refer to “Contacts List” on page 83.

1. Press

sync

➔

and then tap

➔

Accounts and

2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to

synchronize.

3. Tap

within the adjacent account field to reveal the

account’s synchronization settings screen.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

138

Camera

DriveSmart

Use your 3.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG

format.

The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions from

your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to voicemail and

customizing auto responses to both callers and text message

respondents notifying them that your driving.

Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camera will take and store

photos.

Warning!: Using your mobile device while driving may divert your attention

from your responsibilities as a driver, result in an accident or other

injury and could be a violation of law.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Camera).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on page 116.

APPS

DRIVE

(

DriveSmart)

SMART

Cloud Texting

The term "cloud" refers to the idea that there is no hardware or

software required for this function and that the operation of your

texting program is web-based.

2. Tap OK and begin configuring the on-screen application

options:

• Upgrade to DriveSmart Plus allows you to upgrade the phone’s

standard version to a more robust version of the application.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Cloud Texting).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

• DriveSmart enables or disables the DriveSmart application.

• Enable Bluetooth activates Bluetooth and routes all incoming calls

to your handsfree device.

For more information, refer to “Cloud Texting” on page 107.

• Enable Auto Response enables or disable an automatic SMS text

message response to all incoming text messages notifying users

that you are currently driving and can not answer a text.

• Edit Auto Response allows you to edit the default text message

response or create your own. After editing the response tap OK.

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Files

Organize and store data, images, and more in your own personal

file folders. Files are stored to the memory card in separate (user

defined) folders.

Email enables you to review and create email using most email

services. The device alerts you when you receive an email

message.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Files).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Email).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

For more information, refer to “Files” on page 125.

Gallery

For more information, refer to “Email” on page 108.

The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For

photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a

slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as

a picture message.

Facebook

Facebook is a social network service and website that allows

users to create a personal profiles, add other users as friends

and exchange messages, including automatic notifications when

they update their profile.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Facebook).

For more information, refer to “Get Friends” on page 94.

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

For more information, refer to “The Gallery” on page 126.

Google Mail

Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is

configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your

synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize

with your Gmail account on the web.

For more information, refer to “Using Google Mail” on page 114.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

140

Google Search

Highlight

Google Search is a web-based search engine that uses

text-based queries to search for content on web pages.

This downloadable application/widget allows you to stay up to

date on relevant news, Android Market apps and games (specific

to your phone), T-Mobile ringtones, CallerTunes and more.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Highlight).

2. Accept the terms and conditions and tap Accept

3. Select your desired channels/stations (sources of

information) from the list and tap Done

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

Google Search) and enter the search text.

(

– or –

Touch the microphone on the Google Search bar and say

the search information. For more information, refer to

“Search Key” on page 29. F or more information, refer to

“Using Google Search” on page 29.

4. The application then displays information corresponding to

the channel categories you selected.

Group Texting

This service allows you to text a multiple number of contacts

simultaneously.

To adjust the Highlight settings:

1. Press

2. Enable options within these stations/channels.

3. Press to exit the application.

and then tap Settings.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Group Texting).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

For more information, refer to “Group Texting” on page 106.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap the Edit privacy settings field, then tap a location

Latitude

reporting option:

Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and

status messages with each other. It also lets you send instant

messages and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to

your friends’ locations.

• Detect your location to enable the Location feature.

You are now set up and ready to use Latitude.

• Set your location to manually set your location on a map.

• Hide your location to conceal your location from your friends.

5. From the main Latitude application screen, press

Important!: You must sign in to your Google account, and enable the Location

feature before you can use this application. For more

and

information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on page 181.

then tap an available application option such as: See map,

Privacy, or List view

Note: It is best to enable Wi-Fi only after the application has launched.

Maps

1. From the Home screen, tap

Latitude).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view

real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions.

There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of

interest or a specific address. You can view locations on a vector

or aerial map, or you can view locations at the street level.

(

2. Tap Wi-Fi Disabled - Click to enable connection to navigate

to the Wi-Fi Settings menu where you can turn on Wi-Fi if it

is not already enabled. For more information, refer to “Wi-

Fi” on page 172.

Important!: Before using Google Maps you must have an active data (3G) or

connection. The Maps application does not cover every country

or city.

3. If desired, tap Send location to others to share your current

location with your Google friends and contacts.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Maps).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

142

Enabling a Location source

Opening Maps

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for

places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable

the location source you must enable the wireless network, or

enable the GPS satellites.

(Maps).

2. Locate the top row of the applications to access additional

options:

Important!: The more location determining functions are enabled, the more

• Search Maps: allows you to search for a place of interest.

accurate the determination will be of your position.

• Places: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly

locate a business or person, find out more information about a

business, see coupons, public responses, and more (ppage 153).

Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants, Coffee, Bars,

Hotels, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, or Add your own place.)

A list of places within this category displays.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security

2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable GPS to determine

location based on nearby cell towers. Tap Agree

• Layers: allows you to switch map views:

3. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.

–

Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are

displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how

fast the traffic is moving.

4. Tap Use sensor aiding to enhance positioning and save

power using sensors. Tap OK

–

Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite

images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery

available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.

Tip: When using Google Maps you can turn on Enable GPS satellites.

Selecting GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at the

street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses

more battery power.

–

Terrain: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain with the

current map location.

Buzz: allows you post public messages and photos at a location for

everyone to see.

Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your

location with them.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–

More Layers: allows you to add additional layers such as My Maps,

Wikipedia, Transit Lines, Watch the World Cup, and Favorite places.

–

About: displays general information about Google maps such as

Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free

memory, etc.

• My Location: when touched, the location displays on the map with

a blinking blue dot.

Market

3. Press

and select one of the following options:

Android Market provides access to downloadable applications

and games to install on your phone. Android Market also allows

you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or

flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone.

• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.

• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a

starting point.

Accessing the Market

• Starred Places: marks favorite locations on the map. These items

are automatically synchronized with maps.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Market).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

• Clear Map: after viewing or following directions, this option resets

the map.

(

2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap Next

• Join Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status

messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages

and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’

locations.

3. Tap Sign in and enter your Google account information.

4. Tap Accept to agree to the Android Market terms of

• More

service.

–

Labs: a testing ground for experimental features that are not ready to

use publically.

For more information, refer to “Downloading a New Google

Application” on page 145.

Help: uses the browser to display a searchable Google Mobile Help

screen.

Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy

Policy, or Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from

the pop-up menu.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

144

4. Tap Install

Downloading a New Google Application

To download a new application, you will need to use your Google

account to sign in to Android Market. The Android Market home

page provides several ways to find applications. The home page

features applications and includes a list of item applications by

category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My

downloads.

Note: Use caution with applications which request access to any personal

data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage times.

5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for

the application.

6. Check the progress of the current download by opening

Note: If you can not establish a connection with the Android Market,

the Notifications panel.

disconnect your active Wi-Fi connection and try to reconnect.

7. After the item is downloaded and installed on your phone,

1. From the Home screen, tap

Market).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

the content download icon

appears in the

(

notification area of the status bar.

2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're

8. On the Android Market screen, tap Downloads, tap the

installed application in the list, and then tap Open

interested in, and tap the name.

3. Read the application descriptions.

Tip: The newly downloaded application displays on the Home screen or other

selected panel.

Important!: If the selected application requires access to data or control of a

function on your phone, Market displays the information the

application will access.

Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please

contact your service provider for further details.

Touch OK if you agree to the conditions of the application. Once

you touch OK on this screen you are responsible for using this

application on the phone and the amount of data it uses. Use this

feature with caution.

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manage applications

Launching an Installed Google Application

1. From the Home screen, tap Applications).

(

APPS

This feature allows you to manage and remove installed

applications. You can also view the amount of memory or

resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources

for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data,

cache, or defaults.

2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is

typically located on the last Applications page.

Android Development

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

This device can be used for Android application development.

You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this

device, then run the applications using the hardware, system,

and network.

Applications

➔

Manage application.

Clearing application cache and data

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Manage applications

(

Settings) ➔

Warning!: Android Dev Phone 1 devices are not intended for non-developer

end-users. Because the device can be configured with system

software not provided by or supported by Google or any other

company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.

Applications

➔

2. Tap an application you for which you want to clear the

cache or data.

Unknown sources

3. Tap Clear data or Clear cache

This feature can be used for Android application development.

The feature allows developers to install non-Market applications.

Uninstalling third-party applications

You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed

from Android Market.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Applications

➔

Unknown sources.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is

active.

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

2. Tap the third-party application, and from the Application

info screen, tap Uninstall

Applications and Development

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For more information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 69.

Media Hub

Memo options

1. While viewing the list of Memos, press

one of the following options:

Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV

content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch

from the convenience of anywhere.

and select

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Media Hub).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

• Create: allows you to create a memo.

(

• Maximize: remove the bent, lower-right corner of the memo page

and to maximize the information display.

For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 129.

• Delete: allows you to delete one or more memos.

Media Room

The Media Room application plays video files, local music stored on

the SD card, as well as streaming media via Slacker.

• Search: allows you to search within the current set of memos.

• View by: allows you to sort the view of the available memos by

either All or To-do Only

2. Touch and hold the memo then select Send via and choose

the method to send this memo: Bluetooth Email, or

Universal Composer

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Media Room).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

For mor e i nformation, refe r t o “Usin g t h e M edi a R oom” o n p age 126.

Memo

3. From the memo list, touch the upper-left edit button and

This feature allows you to create a memo.

select a color for the memo’s background, then tap Save

1. From the Home screen, tap

Memo).

2. Tap Create memo

3. Compose the memo.

4. Press and select a color and tap Save

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap the Tap to create memo area of the screen and enter

text then tap Save

Messaging

This application allows you to use the Short Message Service

(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from other

mobile phones.

5. Tap the No weather data icon in the upper, left corner (over

the photo) and select a weather condition from the list to

describe the weather conditions for this entry.

You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create

multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile

phones.

6. Tap Save

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Messaging).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Mini Diary settings

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(Mini Diary).

For more information, refer to “Messages” on page 100.

Mini Diary

2. From the main Diary listings page, press

➔

Settings.

This application allows you to create a mini diary where you can

add a photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable

life event.

3. Tap Selected city and tap the city for which you are

documenting this entry.

4. Tap Auto update if you want the settings to automatically

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

APPS

update.

(Mini Diary). Any diary entries display in a list.

Deleting a Mini Diary entry

2. Tap a color template square and tap Save. This selects the

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

APPS

new color template.

3. Tap Tap to add photo field to add a photo for this diary

2. Press

➔

Delete all.

event and touch the source. Selections are: Camera, or

Images

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

148

Mini Diary options

My Account

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

APPS

This option provides you with account specific information such

as your current activity, billing information, Plan Services

information. You can also set alerts for minute or message usage,

payment reminder, or power saver.

2. Select a diary.

3. Press

and select one of the following options:

Note: You may be prompted to log into the Android Market to receive the

• Create: creates a new diary entry.

latest version of the T-Mobile My Account application.

• Delete: deletes the displayed entry.

The differences between My Account and My Device are these:

• Publish: charges may apply when publishing (exporting). Touch Yes

then select Facebook or MySpace.

• My Account: check usage, pay your T-Mobile bill.

• Send via MMS: attaches this entry and sends it as a multimedia

message.

• MyDevice: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage

& Battery.

• Change photo: replaces the photo in this entry by allowing you to

take another photo or use another image.

Tip: Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device.

• Delete photo: deletes the photo from this entry when you touch Yes

to confirm.

1. From the Home screen, tap

My Account).

2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

The initial screen displays four tabs: Activity, Set Alerts, Billing,

and Plan.

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Activity

Plan Services

The Activity tab displays your current minute and message

activity. You can view what percentage of minutes were used as

well as the number of messages used for a particular start date.

The Plan screen displays specific information and charges for

your current plan and services. The screen also displays

additional services information and charges.

My Device

Set Alerts

Use the My Device application to configure device settings, view

support information, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or

Wallpapers, or view battery storage information.

From this screen you can activate alerts to notify you of the

following:

• Minute Usage: tracks the number of minutes used and remaining

in your plan.

1. From the Home screen, tap

My Device).

2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK

(Applications) ➔

APPS

–

Minute Usage Reminder: sends an alert when the number of minutes

used reaches 75 percent of the total available minutes in the plan.

(

Over Limit Alert: sends an alert when usage exceeds your plan’s total

available minutes.

Tip: Use the Menu key (

) to toggle between My Account and My Device.

• Message Usage: tracks the number of messages used and

remaining in your plan. If you plan includes unlimited messages this

setting does not apply.

The differences between My Account and My Device are these:

• My Account: check usage, pay your T-Mobile bill.

• Data Usage: helps you keep track of your data usage.

• My Device: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage

• Payment Reminder: alerts when your bill is due.

& Battery.

• Power Saver: sends an alert when the battery level reaches 30

percent efficiency. The alert displays in the notification window. This

alert is automatically set to On.

The initial screen displays four tabs: Personalize, Quick Tools,

Support, and Storage & Battery.

Billing

This provides a billing summary.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

150

Personalize My Device

Navigation

Using this menu you can personalize Ringtones and Wallpapers.

Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected

turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.

• Ringtones: you can personalize your phone’s ringtones when you

Download HiFi Ringers, view Ringtone Subscriptions, access Voice

Sounds, and access Phone Ringtones.

Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,

dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.

• Wallpapers: you can personalize your phone’s background by

selecting wallpapers from the T-Mobile store, Gallery, Live

Wallpaper, or the Wallpaper Gallery.

Important!: To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the

following conditions:

Quick Tools

- inside a building or between buildings

- in a tunnel or underground passage

- in poor weather

- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields

- in a vehicle with tinted windows

Quick Tools is a shortcut that allows you to view and configure

the following features and parameters: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data

Roaming, GPS, Brightness, Screen Timeout, and Phone Info.

Support

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Navigation).

Enabling GPS Location

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Displays support information My Account Feedback, T-Mobile

Forums, and T-Mobile on Twitter.

(

Storage & Battery

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

From this tab you can view Memory storage information for the

phone or memory card. You can also view the battery level

percentage and other information.

Location and security

2. Tap Use GPS satellites. A check mark indicates the GPS

location feature is enabled.

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Navigation options

Navigation Map options

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Note: If prompted to download a Speechsynthesis Data installer application,

(Navigation).

follow the on-screen instructions to complete this installation.

2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept

If prompted to install a Voice Guidance application, follow the

on-screen instructions to complete this installation.

3. Choose from the following on-screen options:

Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:

• Driving/Walking: configures the method of travel. Selection of

Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and

obstructions.

•

Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options screen.

Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing

(English only).

–

Driving mode enables the Settings feature: allows you to configure

your Route options such as: Avoid highways or Avoid tolls

• Maps: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.

•

Layers: allows you to switch map views:

• Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic

conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color

represents how fast the traffic is moving.

• Speak Destination: allows you to use the voice recognition feature

to search for matching locations in your area.

• Type Destination: allows you to manually enter a destination

• Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth.

Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best

imagery available, most of which is approximately one to three

years old.

address (via the on-screen keypad).

• Contacts: allows you to receive turn-by-turn directions to the

address stored for a selected Contacts entry.

• Parking: displays parking information relative to your current

location.

• Starred Places: allows you to obtain directions to locations that

have been starred within Google maps (maps.google.com).

• Gas Stations: displays gas station location relative to your current

location.

• ATMs & Banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your

current location.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

152

• Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to

your current location.

Places

Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google

Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business

or person, find out more information about the business, see

coupons, public responses, and more.

Press

to access these additional features:

•

Search: manually search for a destination address, place, name of

business, or even a type of business.

•

Set Destination: returns you to the navigation options screen where

you can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting

from a Contacts entry or Starred Place.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Places).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

2. Use the Find places field to manually enter a desired place

or choose from among the various categories. Matches are

filtered by those closest to your current location.

•

Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous description.

Mute: allows you to mute the audio readout and directional

information.

•

Exit Navigation: terminates the application.

More: provides additional application information such as: Help and

Term, Privacy & Notices.

3. Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,

Coffee, Bars, Hotels, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, or

Add your own place.) A list of places within this category

displays.

Caution!: Navigation is a beta product. Use caution.

4. Tap the Maps icon (upper-right) to launch the related maps

feature.

5. Press

and then tap either Starred places or My Maps.

The My Maps function of this application are similar to

those of the Google Maps application, but work along with

the Latitude service where you can share your location

with your chosen Google friends.

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Connectivity: change your Internet and Google Location Service

Settings

settings.

This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your

phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory,

and any extra settings associated with your phone.

3. Follow the onscreen configuration instructions.

– or –

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Tap Home to return to the main home screen.

APPS

(Settings).

T-Mobile Mall

– or –

Press

This downloadable application provides access to several phone

features and tunes.

➔

and then tap

(Settings).

1. From the Home screen, tap

T-Mobile Mall).

2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap I agree

(Applications) ➔

APPS

For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on

page 181.

(

Setup Wizard

Helps you quickly setup various phone options such as Accounts,

Themes, Multi-tasking, and Connectivity.

3. Read the consecutive legal disclaimer screen and tap Yes

or No to agree/disagree to its terms.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Setup Wizard).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

4. Tap OK to complete the activation process.

(

5. Review the on-screen options such as:

2. Tap an on-screen option to begin configuration:

•

Recommendations

Song recommendations

Ringtones

CallerTunes

Applications

• Accounts: setup your email and social network accounts

• Themes: select from multiple phone themes. For more information,

refer to “Theme Changer” on page 156.

• Jump Key Settings: configure your favorite applications so that you

can access them from anywhere.

Games

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

154

T-Mobile TV

Task Manager

T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and

Video on Demand.

Sometimes your phone might seem to slow down over time, and the

biggest reason for this are background applications. These are

applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still

active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which

of theseapplications are still activein the background but also easily

lets you choose which applications are left running and which are

closed.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

T-Mobile TV).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

For more information, refer to “T-Mobile TV” on page 131.

Talk

Shutting Down Applications

You can instant message with Google Talk. Google Talk allows

you to communicate with other people who are also connected

with Google Talk on the phone or on the web.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

Task Manager). This screen contains the following

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Google Talk).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

tabs:

(

• ACTIVE display those currently active applications running on your

phone.

For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 115.

• PACKAGE displays any installed packages or applications from the

Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove

them from your phone.

• RAM, displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access

Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear memory

• SUMMARY displays a visual graph indicating the available and

used space within the INTERNAL PHONE STORAGE storage

location and EXTERNAL SD CARD.

• HELP provides additional battery saving techniques.

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. From the ACTIVE tab, tap Exit to close selected applications

3. Select an onscreen theme by locating it on the center of

or tap Exit all to close all background running applications.

the screen and tapping it.

TeleNav GPS Navigator

ThinkFree Office

TeleNav GPS Navigator is a driving aid that uses both audible and

visual directions for GPS navigation.

ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office

compatible office suite. This application provides a central place

for managing your documents online or offline.

1. From the Home screen, tap

TeleNav GPS Navigator).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document

Format) files.

(

2. A Warning message displays. Read the agreement and tap

1. From the Home screen, tap

ThinkFree Office).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Accept to accept the terms, or tap Exit to close the window.

(

3. Select to either Upgrade to Premium or use the Basic

2. Read the End User License Agreement, then tap Accept if

Navigation service at no charge.

you agree with the terms of use.

4. Enter the required information for TeleNav.

3. On its initial launch, tap Activate now.Three tabs display:

Theme Changer

Allows you to change the current phone theme by selecting from

an array of existing themes.

• Home: displays the introduction to ThinkFree Office and lists a short

description of each of the tabs and what type of information they

provide.

• My Docs: This is where you keep your documents on this device.

You can manage documents, or send them to others, and upload

the documents to ThinkFree Online.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Theme Changer).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

2. Scroll across the screens to go through the available

• Online: This provides your http://thinkfree.com online storage

information. You can also share your documents to others without

using email attachments.

themes.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

156

Tips & Tricks

Twitter

Use the learn functionality to understand more about the features

and functions on your phone.

Twitter is a social networking and microblogging service that

allows you make or answer questions by sending short text

messages up to 140 characters in length, called "tweets", to

your friends, or "followers."

1. From the Home screen, tap

Tips & Tricks).

2. Select an available tutorial:

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Twitter).

Universal Composer

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

•

Sidekick Physical Buttons

Jump Key

The Universal Composer is a messaging feature that lets you

send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones

or email addresses. This feature does much more than just send

and receive text, but incorporate other features such as

emoticons, audio, media and much more.

Group Text

Notification Pop-Up

Media Hub

T-Mobile Video Chat

Media Room

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Universal Composer).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Text Input and Swype

(

3. Slide across the screen to progress through additional

For more information, refer to “Creating and Sending Messages

via Universal Composer” on page 100.

pages.

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To adjust application settings:

1. Press and then tap Settings

Qik Video Chat

This is a mobile video sharing and 2-way video calling service.

This application also lets you record and share experiences with

your friends, family, and your favorite social networks.

2. Choose from any of the following options:

• Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Video Chat) ➔ Sign up

(Applications) ➔

APPS

–

Facebook: set up your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos.

Twitter: set up your Twitter account sharing preferences.

YouTube: set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos.

People: set up your contact sharing parameters.

(

2. Fill in the Email address,

Username, and

• Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is

embedded into your Qik videos. When posting or sharing Qik video

information with others, you can decide how accurate the related

Password, then tap Sign

up to create your new

account.

location information can be. Choose from: Off

City level, Street

level, or Track live

3. Follow the on-screen

instructions. For

• Video encoding quality allows you to assign a video quality to the

outbound video. Choose from: Low Normal, or High

more information, visit:

• About displays the version information for the Qik Video Chat

application.

http://qik.com/

Applications and Development

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording Qik Video

Visual Voicemail

1. From the Home screen,

Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a

voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want

without being limited to chronological order.

tap

APPS

(

Applications) ➔

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Visual Voicemail).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Video Chat).

(

2. Tap Record & Share

For more information, refer to “Visual Voicemail” on page 18.

3. Read the one-time

Voice Search

The Voice Search feature is a voice-activated application that

allows you to tell the phone what to search for and then the

phone activates a Google search based on what you said.

disclaimer describing the

public nature of your

videos and tap OK

4. Tap Record to start

recording.

For more information, refer to “Using Additional Voice Search

Functions” on page 30.

– or –

1. From the Home screen, tap

Voice Search).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

Tap Stop to end the recording process.

(

2. Select Agree if you want Google to use location for

improved search results and other services, or Disagree to

decline.

5. Enter a title for your video segment and select those

services you wish to use to distribute your video.

•

Services such as Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, SMS, and E-mail ask

that you select a recipient for your video segment.

3. At the Speak now screen speak your search command

slowly and clearly. Google searches for the information and

displays related information in the browser.

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To configure YouTube Settings:

Press Settings and configure the following

parameters:

Web

ᮣ

➔

Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully

optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the

Internet browsing feature on your phone.

• High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all

videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile

network.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Web).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

• Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on-screen

captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Extra Large.

For more information, refer to “Web” on page 161.

Wi-Fi Calling

This feature allows you to make calls using a Wi-Fi over the

T-Mobile network.

• Clear search history allows you to clear any previous YouTube

searches from appearing within the search box.

• SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for

videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these

videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:

Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Wi-Fi Calling).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

• Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.

• Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.

• Google Mobile and YouTube Terms of Service

• Google Mobile and YouTube Privacy Policies

For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Calling” on page 58.

YouTube

YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload

and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.

• Application version displays the software version for the current

YouTube application.

1. From the Home screen, tap

YouTube).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

(

To watch a high quality video:

While playing a video, press

High quality on mobile

2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and

ᮣ

➔

Settings

➔

viewing posted videos.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

160

Section 10: Connections

Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly

connect to the web.

•

More Sites: displays different on-screen pages containing

shortcuts to a variety of different applications (Email/IM,

Social/Chat, etc..) and categories (Sports, Weather,

En Español, My Account).

Web

Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the

mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the browser

and use the basic features.

Yahoo Mail: displays the Sign in for Yahoo Mail. Register by sending a

text message with the word START to 92500 if you are not already

registered.

Accessing the Internet

•

Facebook: displays the Facebook Log in. Sign up from this page if you

are not already registered.

To access the Browser:

AccuWeather: based on your location settings, AccuWeather displays

the current weather conditions.

APPS

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Web).

(Applications) ➔

(

•

CNN: displays current news headlines and more.

ESPN: displays current sports news headlines and more.

E! Online: displays current entertainment news headlines and more.

Mapquest: provides access to the online mapquest site.

Yelp: provides access to Yelp which is an online urban city guide that

helps people find cool places to eat, shop, drink, relax and play. Its the

fun and easy way to find, review and talk about what's great in your

world.

Homepage

When you access the Browser, the web2go home page displays the

following topics:

•

Google Search: allows you to quickly search for online topics using

the Google search engine.

Advertisement: provides an on-screen advertisement bubble

providing suggested phone applications.

Downloads: allows you to download Ringtone, Callertunes, Games,

Apps, or Gift and Deals.

•

What’s Now: provides quick access to a variety of different

entertainment and shopping websites.

My Account: provides quick access to your My Account page.

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–

Add shortcut to Home: adds a shortcut to your web2go homepage on

your phone’s Home screen.

Navigating with the Browser

1. To select an item, tap an entry.

–

Add RSS feeds: adds RSS feeds to your browser.

Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.

Page info: displays information about the selected page.

2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your

finger in an up or down motion.

Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a

message.

3. To return to the previous page, press

Browser Options

1. From the home page, press

–

Downloads: displays the download history.

to access the following

Settings: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by

changing these options. See “Browser Settings” on page 165.

options:

Entering a URL

• New window: displays a new window so you can browse multiple

URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and Deleting

Windows” on page 163.

You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites

are optimized for viewing on your phone.

• Windows: displays a list of the windows you have open.

To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these steps:

• Brightness setting: allows you to manually adjust the screen

brightness.

ᮣ

Tap the URL field at the top of the screen, enter the URL

and tap Go

Note: If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled (Settings

➔

Display

➔

Search the Internet

Brightness), you can not modify the browser’s brightness setting.

To perform an Internet search using keywords, follow these

steps:

• Refresh: reloads the current page.

• Forward: forwards the browser to another web page.

• More: displays the following additional options:

1. Tap the Google search field, enter the keyword(s) to

search using the on-screen keypad.

–

Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.

Connections

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Tap

(Search). A list of search results displays.

Using Bookmarks

While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly

and easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website

addresses) of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks

page. From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most

visited websites and view your History.

•

Depnding on which screen you are on, the search icon might also

appear as

3. Tap a link to view the website.

Adding and Deleting Windows

You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time. To

add a new window, follow these steps:

1. From the Home webpage, tap

displays. Additional pages include FREQUENT and HISTORY

2. Press to display the following options:

. The Bookmarks page

1. From your browser, press

and then tap New window.

– or –

• Bookmark last-viewed page: Creates a new bookmark for the

last webpage that you viewed.

Press

and then tap Windows

➔

New Window.

• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view a

thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List view

to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.

2. A new browser window displays.

3. Press

windows.

and then tap Windows to see a list of all open

• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new

bookmarks.

3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a

Note: This icon will display a number that corresponds to the current number

of active browser windows,

bookmark for the following options:

• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.

4. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active

windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet

window.

• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.

• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the

bookmark. For more information, refer to “Editing Bookmarks”

on page 164.

5. Tap

163

next to the listing to delete the window.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Add shortcut to Home: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked

3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the

webpage to your phone’s Home screen.

bookmark or the URL.

• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth, Email,

Gmail, or Universal Composer.

4. Tap OK

• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a

Deleting Bookmarks

1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark

you want to delete.

message.

• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more

information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 164.

2. Tap Delete bookmark

• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.

Adding Bookmarks

3. At the confirmation window, tap OK

1. From the Home webpage, tap

➔

Add.

Emptying the Cookies

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the

A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during

navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific

information, a cookie can also contain some personal information

(such as a username and password) which might pose a security

risk if not properly managed. You can clear these cookies from

your phone at any time.

bookmark and the URL.

3. Assign a folder location. Home is the default.

4. Tap OK. The new save page now appears on the

Bookmarks page.

1. From the Home webpage, press

and then tap

Editing Bookmarks

1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark

you want to edit.

More Settings Clear all cookie data.

➔

2. Tap Yes to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit.

2. Tap Edit bookmark

Connections

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Web History

Browser Settings

The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed

websites. These entries can be used to return to previously

unmarked web pages.

To make configure browser settings, follow these steps:

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Web).

and then tap More

(Applications) ➔

(

1. From the Home webpage, tap

➔

HISTORY tab.

2. Press

➔

Settings.

A list of the most recently viewed websites displays.

3. Choose from the following on-screen options:

2. Tap an entry to display the webpage.

• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or

Close.

– or –

• Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of recently viewed

Press

and then tap Clear history to delete the current

web pages.

History list.

• Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.

Frequent

• Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup advertisement or

windows from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to

disable this function.

The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited

and bookmarked websites. These entries are used to return to

previously unmarked web pages.

• Loadimages: Allows web page images to load along with the other

text components of a loaded website.

1. From the Home webpage, tap

➔

FREQUENT tab.

• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of

the screen as possible.

A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays.

The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of

the list.

• Landscape view only: Displays the browser in only the horizontal

position.

• Enable JavaScript: Enables javascript for the current Web page.

Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove

the checkmark to disable this function.

2. Tap any entry to display the selected webpage.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe

Flash.

• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or

passwords. Tap Yes to complete the process.

• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page

and displayed behind the current one. Remove the checkmark to

disable this function.

• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue

with the current website. Remove the checkmark to disable this

function.

• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser.

• Set search engine: Allows you to choose a default search engine

for your phone. Choose from: Google Yahoo!, or Bing.

• Default storage: Sets the default storage to Memory card.

• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites.

• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap Yes to

complete the process.

• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to

default.

• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap Yes to

complete the process.

Bluetooth

• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and

read cookies from your device.

About Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that

allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth

devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and

Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless

devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to

approximately 30 feet.

• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.

• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any

previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this

function.

• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out

forms. Tap Yes to complete the process.

• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your

location.

• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap

Yes to complete the process.

• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for

visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.

Connections

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

Bluetooth Settings

To turn Bluetooth on:

The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the

characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

•

Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth

communication and description

➔

Bluetooth settings

Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth

devices

indicates active). When active,

Status area.

displays in the

Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address

To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:

1. Press and then tap

Wireless and network Bluetooth settings

To turn Bluetooth off:

1. Press

Wireless and network

➔

(Settings) ➔

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Bluetooth settings

2. Verify Bluetooth is active. Indicated by a check mark in the

2. Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature.

Bluetooth field.

Bluetooth Status Indicators

3. Tap the Device name Visible, and Scan devices fields to set

The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status

at a glance:

the options.

Displays when Bluetooth is active.

To change your Bluetooth name:

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and

communicating.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name

3. Enter a new name.

4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To set visibility:

Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once

pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible

To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:

Making your device visible allows other devices to pair and

communicate.

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible

Note: Your device is visible for up to 120 seconds (2 minutes). This value

Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an

external device.

appears as a countdown within this field.

To scan for Bluetooth devices:

3. Tap Scan devices. Your device displays a list of discovered

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

in-range Bluetooth devices.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan devices to

search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices

such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.

4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.

5. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK

6. The external device must accept the connection and enter

Pairing Bluetooth Devices

your device’s PIN code.

The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted

connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.

When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,

secure connections while bypassing the discovery and

authentication process.

Once successfully paired to an external device,

displays in the Status area.

Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-

compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and

functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all

Bluetooth-compatible devices.

Connections

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the

name of the previously paired device (from the bottom of

the page). This opens the connected device’s menu

options.

Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between

the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the

pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device,

there is no need to setup the connection information again.

3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

Sending Contacts via Bluetooth

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch the previously

Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you

may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items

using a Bluetooth connection.

paired device (from the bottom of the page).

3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.

– or –

Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your

phone and the external device, and the recipient’s device must be

visible.

From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the

name of the previously paired device, and select

Only a Contact’s information can be sent via Bluetooth. No other file

type (video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.

Disconnect

Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.

paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off.

CONTACTS

2. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device

3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the

Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record”

and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the

previous pairing information.

on-screen context menu.

4. Tap Send namecard via

➔

Bluetooth and select a paired

external Bluetooth device.

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PC Connections

Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for

the pairing to be successful.

You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data

cable using various USB connection modes. When you connect

the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with Windows

Media Player, and transfer data to and from your device directly.

5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications

list.

What is Kies Mini?

Enable Downloading for Web Applications

Samsung Kies Mini is a software that enables you to update your

device firmware by connecting to the PC.

Important!: Before you can download a web application you must insert an

SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature

(enables downloading). For more information, refer to “Installing

the microSD Memory Card” on page 9. Also, see “Mounting the

SD Card” on page 51.

To learn more about Samsung Kies Mini and other Samsung

applications:

1. Browse samsung Support site and locate your phone:

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads

Applications

2. Navigate to the Software tab and download Kies Mini.

2. Tap the Unknown sources check box.

Important!: If you need any additional USB drivers, these can also be found

3. Tap Yes to allow install of non-Market applications.

Tap again to remove the checkmark and disable the

installation of non-market applications.

within the phone’s Download Center

Software tab.

Warning!: Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to protect

your phone and data, use Android Market to install web

applications. For more information, refer to “Downloading a New

Google Application” on page 145.

Connections

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Prior to using Kies Mini for Phone Update

3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction

jack on your device to a PC.

Before using Kies Mini to upgrade your device, it is

recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use.

4. Run Samsung Kies Mini and follow the prompts to update

To export a Contact list to your microSD card:

your device firmware.

CONTACTS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

5. Refer to Samsung Kies Mini Help for more information.

2. Press

and then tap Import/Export.

Synchronizing with Windows Media Player

3. Tap Export to SD card

➔

OK. For more information, refer to

Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC.

“Export/Import” on page 97.

1. Press

Applications

2. Press the Home key to return to Idle mode.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:

➔

USB settings Media player.

➔

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(Applications) ➔

(

3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction

jack on your device to a PC with Windows Media Player

installed.

2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.

3. Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD

card prior to initiating a Kies Mini update.

A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.

Connecting with Kies Mini

4. Open Windows Media Player to synchronize music files.

1. Install Samsung Kies Mini software on your PC.

5. Edit or enter your device’s name in the pop-up window.

2. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

6. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync list

Applications

➔

USB settings Kies (Firmware update).

➔

and begin synchronizing.

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting as a Mass Storage Device

Wi-Fi

You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and

access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the

device, you can also access the files directory from the memory

card by using the device as a memory card reader.

About Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain

types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi

communication requires access to an existing and accessible

Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open

(unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring

knowledge of the Router name and password).

Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk,

separate from the internal memory.

1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files from

Activating Wi-Fi

or to the memory card.

By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).

Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to

compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).

Note: To use any downloaded market application that requires a USB

connection between your phone and your PC, you should first set the

USB setting to Mass storage

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

2. Press

Applications

3. Press to return to Idle mode.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

2. Tap Wi-Fi to activate the feature. A checkmark indicates

that Wi-Fi is active. The device scans for available in-range

wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks

on the same screen.

➔

USB settings Mass storage.

➔

4. Connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC

using an optional PC data cable.

A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.

5. Open the folder to view files.

6. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.

Connections

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

Manually Add a New Network Connection

1. Tap Add Wi-Fi network

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access

The network names and security settings (Open network or

Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in

the Wi-Fi networks section.

Point).

3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This

must match the current security setting on your target

WAP.

2. Tap the network you wish to connect to.

4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.

Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.

5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the

target WAP.

3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary).

Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to

connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network. The

WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default

settings.

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Deactivating Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Advanced Settings

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of

the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:

Wireless and network

➔

•

Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy

2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to deactivate the feature. The

Viewing the device’s MAC Address

Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP

checkmark grays.

To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:

1. Press and then tap

Wireless and network Wi-Fi settings

and then tap Advanced

Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can

reduce battery life and use times.

➔

(Settings) ➔

➔

Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network

2. Press

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Press and then tap Scan

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Wi-Fi settings

Mobile AP

This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Wi-Fi hotspot.

The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA+

(4G) data services (although 3G service can also be used).

Wi-Fi Status Indicators

The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:

Important!: The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as

Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi connection prior to launching the

Mobile AP service.

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected to and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is no

communication with a target Wireless Access Point

(WAP).

Connections

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To activate the Mobile AP service:

1. Press and then tap

Wireless and network Tethering and portable hotspot

Mobile AP

Note: Using your 4G service and Mobile AP Hotspot drains your phone’s

battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature

combination.

➔

(Settings) ➔

➔

The best way to keep using the phone as a hotspot is to have it

connected to a power supply.

2. Tap Mobile AP and place a checkmark in the adjacent field

To connect to the Hotspot:

to activate the service.

1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target device

(laptop, media device, etc.).

Note: If your Wi-Fi is already active, you will be asked to turn it off prior to

2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select your

continuing with the MobileAp setup process.

phone hotspot from the network list.

3. Tap OK to continue with the activation.

•

The default name for your phone’s hotspot is AndroidAPXXXX.

4. Write down the Network SSID name. This name is

generally AndroidAPXXXX. This can be changed later. For

more security information, refer to page 176.

You can change the name by tapping Mobile AP settings

Network SSID and changing the entry.

➔

3. Select this Hotspot and follow your on-screen instructions

to complete the connection.

5. Confirm the Mobile AP service icon

appears at the

top of the screen.

4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet

connection.

Note: By default, the connection is open and not secured. It is recommended

that you access the Mobile AP settings and create a secure connection

by using a password for communication.

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To secure the Mobile AP service:

The two most common methods for securing your connection to

the Hotspot are to a security method (WPA2 PSK) and to Hide

your phone’s SSID name.

1. Press

Wireless and network

Mobile AP Mobile AP settings

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Tethering and portable hotspot

➔

2. Tap the Network SSID field and change the name of the

Mobile AP.

3. Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK

4. With security enabled, enter a new password into the

Password field.

Important!: The more complex the password, the harder it will be for

intruders to break your security. It is recommended that you not

use names, birthdays, or

5. Tap the Hide my device field to keep your phone from

transmitting its Network SSID name.

Connections

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 11: Time Management

This section describes how you can manage time using time-

related applications such as the Calendar, Alarm Clock, Analog or

Digital clock, and the World clock.

• Go to: displays a specific date.

• Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting

the date.

• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or

Calendar

an individual event.

With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,

week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a

reminder.

• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.

Creating a Calendar Event

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Important!: You must have previously added an account (Facebook, Microsoft

(

Calendar).

10 1112

Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the Calendar.

141516171819

2. From the Month tab, press

➔

Create.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Calendar Settings

(

Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:

10 1112

141516171819

Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which

you want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to

view the calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to

manage events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.

• Month: displays the Month view.

• Week: displays the Week view.

• Day: displays the Day view.

• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,

or Day. Or you can look for events for a future date.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

10 1112

141516171819

2. Press

and select one of the following options:

2. Press

➔

Settings.

• Search: allows you to search within your current events.

• Create: creates a new Event.

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Tap Calendars and select the calendar categories you want

to display or touch All calendars. A check mark indicates

selection.

11. Tap Vibrate to activate this notification option. Selections

are: Always Only in Silent mode, or Never

12. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event

4. Tap Calendar sync and select the type of general

synchronization settings you want. A check mark indicates

selection.

notification.

Alarm and Clocks

This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring at a specified

time, track time in other parts of the world, use a stopwatch, or

set a timer.

5. Tap Default view and select a view: Month

List

6. Tap Day views and select a type: Time grid, or Event list

7. Tap First day of week and select either Sunday or Monday

Week, Day, or

APPS

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Alarm & Clocks).

(

Applications) ➔

(

Setting an Alarm

1. From the Home screen, tap

8. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check

APPS

(Applications) ➔

mark indicates selection.

(Alarm & Clocks).

9. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your

current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from

within the Select time zone field.

2. Tap

(Create alarm).

3. Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour, and

minutes, then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on which

was last selected).

10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event notification

method. Choose from: Alert

Status bar notification, and

Off.

Time Management

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

178

4. Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times

9. Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to

decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the

volume level plays.

you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: One-time

event Daily, Every weekday(Mon-Fri), or Weekly. If you

selected Weekly, a button row displays. Tap each day of

the week in which you want this alarm to repeat, then tap

World Clock

This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of

world.

Save

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

5. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm.

6. Tap the radio button to activate a tone for the Snooze

2. Tap the WORLD CLOCK tab.

Tap the field to assign a duration time (3 min, 5 min,

10 min, 15 min, or 30 min) and snooze repetition (1 time,

2 times, 3 times, 5 times, and 10 times).

3. Tap

or tap in the search field to locate a city.

To assign DST settings:

1. Locate a desired city from the World Clock list.

2. Touch and hold a city and select DST settings

3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, 1 hour or 2 hours).

(Add city) then scroll and select the desired city,

• Duration indicates the length of time the alrm will remain silent

between alarm notifications (snooze time).

• Snooze repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are

assigned to this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence the

alarm.

7. Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:

Melody Vibration, Vibration and melody, or Voice.

8. Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following:

Sounds, or Go to My files. Locate a sound to use as an

alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone.

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stopwatch

This feature allows you to use a stopwatch to time multiple laps.

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(Alarm & Clocks) ➔ STOPWATCH tab.

2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter.

3. Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter.

4. Tap Stop to stop the counter.

5. Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have

multiple lap times.

6. Tap Reset to reset the counter.

Setting a Timer

1. From the Home screen, tap

APPS

(Applications) ➔

(

Alarm & Clocks) ➔ TIMER tab.

2. Tap the hr min, or sec field and use the on-screen keypad

to enter the hour, minute, or seconds.

3. Tap Start to start the timer.

4. Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and

start over.

5. Tap Restart to resume the timer counter.

Time Management

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

180

Section 12: Changing Your Settings

Thissectionexplainsthesoundandphonesettingsforyourphone.

It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any

extra settings associated with your phone.

Activating Wi-Fi

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings.

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

Wireless and Networks

Using Flight mode

2. Tap Wi-Fi. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi is

active.

Flight mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features,

such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane

or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is

prohibited.

Wi-Fi settings

Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your phone automatically uses

Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile phone services.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Configure the settings as desired.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Important!: When your phone is in Flight Mode, it cannot send or receive any

➔

Wi-Fi settings

calls or access online information or applications.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

The available connection types displayed with a security type

displayed next to them.

Wireless and network

2. Tap Flight mode. A check mark displayed next to the

feature indicates Flight mode is active.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Notification

WPS allows you to push buttons instead of entering a network

name and wireless security PIN.

By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the

Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi

network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to

receive notifications.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap WPS button connection

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Wi-Fi settings

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

3. Press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi access point within 2

Wireless and network

➔

minutes.

2. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to

Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network

the feature indicates Network notification is active.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

3. Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark

Wireless and network

➔

and deactivate this feature.

2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on.

WPS Button Connection

3. Tap Add Wi-Fi network

The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button is a standard for easy

and secure wireless network set up and connections. To use

WPS, the connecting device must support WPS and be

compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. WPS can

automatically set up a random network name and WPA wireless

security for wireless Wi-Fi phones, routers, access points,

computers, adapters, and other electronic devices.

4. Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) and Security settings

then tap Save

Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its purpose is

to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN — whether

accidentally or intentionally. To communicate, wireless devices must

be configured with the same SSID.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

182

Bluetooth settings

Activating Visibility

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device

name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can

discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with

which to pair.

Wireless and network

➔

Bluetooth settings

➔

Visible.

The phone is now activated for discovery for 119 seconds

so you can pair with another device. After 119 seconds the

phone becomes undiscoverable again.

Activating Bluetooth

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Scanning for Devices

Wireless and network

➔

Bluetooth settings

This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you

can pair with them.

2. Tap Bluetooth to turn it on.

1. Press

Wireless and network

Scan devices

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.

➔

Bluetooth settings

➔

Activating the Device Name

1. Activate Bluetooth.

Your phone begins scanning and lists any discovered

devices in the Bluetooth devices section.

2. Press

Wireless and network

The assigned device name displays.

3. Press to erase the current device name and enter a

new name for this device using the keyboard.

4. Tap OK to confirm your setting.

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

➔

Bluetooth settings

➔

Device name.

2. Tap a device name to pair with the device.

Important!: Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to

confirm and pair with them.

3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and

tap OK

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tethering

To disconnect tethering:

1. Press

Wireless and network

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data

connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and

computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be

the Mobile AP feature.

➔

Tethering and portable hotspot

2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the

check mark and deactivate the feature.

Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while

using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers

are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/

downloads.

3. Remove the USB cable from the phone.

Mobile AP

For more information, refer to “Mobile AP” on page 174.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Help

Wireless and network

➔

Tethering and portable hotspot

Provides an on-screen description of USB Tethering and Portable

Wi-Fi hotspots.

2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your

phone.

VPN settings

3. When prompted for a USB mode, press

twice to exit

The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual

Private Networks (VPNs).

the menu.

4. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering and portable hotspot

menu. This places a check mark next to the entry and

activates the feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active

notification briefly appears on the screen.

Important!: Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one.

Look for the Tethering active icon

area of the screen.

in the Status bar

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

184

Adding a VPN

To establish a L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based L2TP/IPSec):

1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).

Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to

use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2

Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based

L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).

2. Set the VPN server.

3. Set IPSEc pre-shared key.

4. Enable L2TP secret.

5. Set L2TP secret.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap Add VPN

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

VPN settings

6. Set the DNS search domains.

To establish a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol):

To establish a L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec):

1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).

2. Set the VPN server.

3. Enable L2TP secret.

4. Set L2TP secret.

3. Enable encryption (if desired).

4. Set the DNS search domains.

To establish a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol):

5. Set user certificate.

1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).

Note: A user certificate must be installed to use this setting.

2. Set the VPN server.

3. Enable L2TP secret.

4. Set L2TP secret.

6. Set CA certificate.

Note: A CA certificate must be installed to use this setting.

5. Set the DNS search domains.

7. Set the DNS search domains.

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Access Point Names

Mobile networks

Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your

location or search for places of interest, you must enable the

Mobile networks options.

To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point

(hotspot).

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

Access Point

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Wireless and network

➔

Mobile networks

Names. A list of the Access point names display. The active

access point displays a bright green, filled circle to the

right of the name.

The following options display:

Use packet data

Allows you to activate data usage on your phone.

Network mode

ᮣ

Press

Wireless and network

Use packet data

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use

either a 2G (GSM) or 3G (WCDMA) data network connection.

➔

Mobile networks

➔

ᮣ

Press

Wireless and network

mode

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

Network

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Data Roaming

Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s

partner networks and access data services when you are out of

your service providers area of coverage.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap Data roaming

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

➔

Mobile networks

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

186

Using the 4G Network

Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.

To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection,

the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both

the fastest and most stable connection/communication method.

This phone is capable of using either 4G/3G services for this

connection.

Using the 3G Network

If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed,

follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network.

1. Press

Wireless and network

mode

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

1. Press

Wireless and network

mode

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Network

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Network

2. Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this option

2. Tap GSM/WCDMA (auto mode). A check mark displays next

to this option to indicate that it is active. This is the default

mode for this phone.

to indicate that it is active.

Network Operators

Using this feature you can view the current network connection.

You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set

the network selection to Automatic.

Using the 2G (EDGE) Network

If you are not using applications that require the 3G network

speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a

browser), using the 2G network saves battery life.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

Mobile networks

1. Press

Wireless and network

mode

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

2. Tap Network operators. The current network connection

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Network

displays at the bottom of the list.

2. Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option to

Important!: You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an

available network.

indicate that it is active.

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Tap Search now to manually search for a network.

Call Settings

To access the Call settings menu:

4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

connection.

Call settings

Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.

– or –

APPS

From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Default Setup Options

(

Settings) ➔ Call settings.

Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically search

for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to

select a network each time you connect.

Configuring General Call Settings

Configure the general call settings using this option.

1. Press

Wireless and network

operators

2. Tap Default setup

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

Network

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

Settings) ➔ Call settings

2. Tap one of the following options:

(

Applications) ➔

➔

Mobile networks

➔

(

➔

All calls

• Show my number: allows you to select how your ID is handled

when an outgoing call is initiated.

3. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually.

– or –

• Auto reject: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or

messages.

Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a

• Answering call: selects how your phone answers incoming calls.

Enable Answering mode, then select one of the following methods

for answering the phone:

network.

–

Answering mode activates or deactivates the answering mode

function.

–

Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone.

Changing Your Settings

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–

Automatic answering ,when connected, automatically answers a call

via the headset after a period of time. Selections are: Off, after 1

second, after 2 seconds, after 3 seconds, after 4 seconds, or after 5

seconds.

–

Always forward: incoming calls are re-routed to a secondary number

that you specify.

Forward when busy: forwards all your calls to voicemail when your

phone is busy.

• Prefix dialing: when activated, this feature automatically prepends

a string of numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number.

This feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an

area code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one

prefix. For more information, refer to “Prefix Dialing” on

page 55.

Forward when unanswered: automatically forwards to your

voicemail number when the phone is not answered, and otherwise

allows you to enter a voicemail number.

–

Forward when unreachable: automatically forwards to your

voicemail number when the phone is not in service, or is turned off.

• Call barring: allows specified numbers to be barred from this

phone.

• Reject call with message: allows you to send a message

immediately after rejecting a call.

• Call waiting: enables call waiting functionality. When deactivated,

all incoming calls are directed to your voicemail if you are already on

an active call.

• Call status tones: sets a tone to play for the following status tones:

Call connect tone, Minute minder, or Call end tone. Touch each type

of status tone you want to play.

• Auto redial: automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to

connect or the call is cut off.

• Outgoing call vibration: allows your phone to vibrate when the

called party answers.

Fixed Dialing Numbers

• Alerts on call: activates an alert tone for new messages being

received during an active call.

Fixed Dial Number (FDN), allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a

limited set of phone numbers.

Configuring Voice Calls

Enabling FDN

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap one of the following options:

• Call forwarding: configures call forwarding options:

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap Enable FDN

3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Voice call

➔

Fixed Dialing Numbers.

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Managing the FDN List

Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this

menu does not display.

When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone

numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.

The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect

PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer

service for assistance.

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap Enable FDN

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Fixed Dialing Numbers.

Changing the PIN2 Code

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap Change PIN2

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK

➔

Fixed Dialing Numbers.

FDN is enabled.

4. Tap FDN list then press

and then tap Add contact or

3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.

4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.

5. Confirm your PIN2 code.

edit the contacts that were stored.

Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this

menu does not display.

The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect

PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer

service for assistance.

Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this

menu does not display.

The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect

PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer

service for assistance.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

190

Voicemail

Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check

with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is

compatible with digital cell phones.

You can view your voicemail number from this menu.

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap Voicemail service and select My carrier

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that

plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not

provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device

manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.

➔

Voicemail

3. Tap Voicemail number to now view your number within the

1. Press

➔

and then tap

TTY mode

(Settings) ➔

Voicemail number field.

Call settings

➔

HAC Mode

2. Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the

This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid

Compatibility for this device.

feature. Off is the default setting.

Drive Smart

1. Press

➔

and then tap

HAC mode

(Settings) ➔

Call settings

➔

The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions

from your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to

voicemail and customizing auto responses to both callers and

text message respondents notifying them that your driving.

2. Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the

feature. Off is the default setting.

TTY Mode

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

DriveSmart

A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a

telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,

hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to

communicate by telephone.

For more information, refer to “DriveSmart” on page 139.

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup Phone Vibration

Sound Settings

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well

as configure the display settings.

2. Tap Vibrate and select a vibration mode:

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

• Always

The following options display:

• Never

• Only in silent mode

• Only when not in silent mode

Silent mode

Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from

making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the

speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of

incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a defined

tone or sound as an alert.

Note: The Phone vibrate setting is independent of other call sounds settings.

For example, if you have Silent mode enabled with Phone vibrate, your

phone won’t play a ringtone, but will vibrate for an incoming call.

Adjusting the Volume Settings

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

The Volume menu now provides access to various volume

settings within one on-screen popup menu.

2. Tap Silent mode

– or –

1. Press

Volume

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound

1. From the Home screen, press and hold the Lock key until

➔

Phone options displays.

2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume

2. Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode (the

settings for any of the following volume levels.

current mode displays).

• Incoming call volume

Media volume, System volume, or

Notification volume

3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

192

Setup the Voice Call Ringtone

Screen Lock Sounds

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

The screen lock sounds option is used to activate/deactivate

sounds when locking and unlocking the screen.

2. Tap Phone ringtone

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly

2. Tap Screen lock sounds. A check mark displayed next to

plays when selected.

these features indicates active status.

4. Tap OK to assign a ringer.

Haptic Feedback and Vibration Intensity

Setting a Notification Ringtone

Instead of sounding a tone, the Haptic feedback option vibrates

when you press soft keys on certain screens. You can also set the

intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound

➔

Notification ringtone

2. Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

Audible Tone Settings

2. Tap Haptic feedback. A check mark displayed next to the

feature indicates Haptic feedback is active.

The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used

when you use the dialing pad or making a screen selection. Each

time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone

sounds.

3. Tap Vibration intensity then touch and drag the slider to

adjust the vibration intensity, then touch OK

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

2. Tap Audible touch tones or Audible selection. A check mark

displayed next to these features indicates active status.

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• TV out: connects your phone to your television (using an optional

cable) and displays any image stored on the phone directly on your

television.

Display Settings

In this menu, you can change various settings for the display

such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock

feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power saving

mode, and tv out settings.

• My Social Network Status: updates your social network status

directly from within the Notification Panel. For more information,

refer to “Notification Bar” on page 27.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Connecting your Phone to the TV

TV out

Display. The following options display:

• Wallpapers: assigns either the Home screen or Lock screen

This feature allows you to connect your phone to your television

(using an optional cable) and view any imaged stored on the

phone and view it directly on your television.

wallpaper images.

• Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are:

Default font, Choco cooky, Cool jazz, and Rosemary. Tap Get fonts

online to download additional fonts.

Note: The TV system (NTSC) option is used if you are connecting to an older,

analog NTSC system.

• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap Automatic

brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust and tap OK

• Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically

switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa.

When this setting is disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode

only.

• Animation: determines whether some or all of the window

elements animate. Selections are: No animations, Some

animations, or All animations.

• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen

automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds,

1 minute, 2 minutes, and 10 minutes.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

194

To use the TV out feature:

Enabling the GPS Satellites

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Display

➔

TV out.

Location and security

2. Tap one of the following options:

• TV out to play all of the phone's video output through the TV-out

2. Tap Use GPS satellites enable the GPS satellite.

Enabling the sensor aiding

feature.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

• TV system: to play the phone's video out through an analog TV

video system converter (NTSC/PAL).

Location and security. For more information, refer to

“Enabling a Location source” on page 143.

Note: NTSC is usually used in America.

2. Tap Use sensor aiding enhances positioning and save

Location and Security

power while using the sensors.

The Location and Security settings allow you to configure phone

location and security settings.

Screen Unlock Pattern Settings

To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a

screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every

time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen

automatically turns off).

Using Wireless Networks

Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your

location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use

wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security

2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information

using the wireless network.

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting an Unlock Pattern

7. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping

Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.

Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the

phone. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will

draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to

unlock the phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate

the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback

while drawing the pattern.

Changing the Screen Lock Pattern

This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock

pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to

changing your password from time to time.

1. Press

Location and security

2. Tap Set screen lock

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

Location and security

2. Tap Set screen lock

3. Read the instructions then tap Next

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Change screen lock.

➔

Pattern.

3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.

4. Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous

4. Review the onscreen animation procedure for drawing a

section.

pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern.

Using Visible a Pattern

5. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point.

Then, without removing your finger from the screen, drag

your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line

overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green

circle.

When enabled, this feature displays the onscreen lock grid that is

used to unlock the phone.

Using Tactile Feedback

When enabled, the User tactile feedback option, you will feel

vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern.

6. When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,

horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the

screen and tap Continue

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

196

PIN Lock and Unlock

Setting up SIM Card Lock

1. Press

Location and security

2. Tap Set screen lock

3. Tap PIN

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make

unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your

SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security

4. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch

2. Tap Set up SIM card lock

OK to confirm the password.

3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then touch OK

5. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.

Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in

order to unlock the phone.

Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN

code.

To change an existing SIM Card PIN:

Password Lock and Unlock

1. Tap Change SIM PIN

2. Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK

3. Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK

4. Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK

1. Press

Location and security

2. Tap Set screen lock

3. Tap Password

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap OK to confirm

the password.

5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to

confirm.

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Password Settings

Credential Storage

When you create a phone password you can also configure the

phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an

asterisk (*).

This option allows certain applications to access secure

certificates and other credentials. Certificates and credentials

can be installed to the SD card and password protected.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security

2. Tap Visible passwords to activate this feature.

2. Tap Use secure credentials to activate this feature. A check

mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure

credentials is active.

Device Administration

Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone

in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This

would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or

stolen. The phone could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through

administration) from a remote location.

3. Tap Install encrypted certificates to install encrypted

certificates from the memory (SD) card.

4. Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage

password.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

5. Tap Clear storage to clear the storage (SD card or phone

memory) of all contents and reset the credentials

password.

Location and security

2. Tap Select device administrators to begin configuring this

setting.

3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

198

Managing Applications

Applications

This phone can be used for Android development. You can write

applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run

the applications using the hardware, system, and network. This

feature allows you to configure the device for development.

This feature allows you to manage installed applications. You can

view and control currently running services, or use the device for

application development.

You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as

well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the

applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.

Warning!: Android Dev Phones are not intended for non-developer end-

users. Because the device can be configured with system

software not provided by or supported by Google or any other

company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

Unknown Sources

Clearing Application Cache and Data

Before you can download a web application you must enable the

Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can

use this option to install non-Market applications.

Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this

feature.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

2. Tap Unknown sources to active this feature.

2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.

3. Tap Clear data or Clear cache

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Uninstalling Third-party Applications

Running Services

The Running services option allows you to view and control

currently running services such as Backup, Google Talk, SNS

(messaging), Swype, and more.

Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this

feature.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

Applications

➔

Running services

2. Tap the Third-party tab and select your desired application.

The screen displays all the processes that are running.

3. Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application

2. Tap a process to stop the process from running.

info page).

When you stop the process the service or application will

no longer run until you start the process or application

again.

4. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.

5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap

OK.

Important!: Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the

application.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

200

Android Development

USB Settings

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

This menu selects the method of communication for the USB

port.

Applications

➔

Development

Note: Before initiating a USB connection with the phone you must disable the

Important!: These features are used for development purposes only.

Bluetooth feature, and/or USB debugging feature.

USB Debugging

1. Press

Applications

2. Select one of the following USB modes:

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

This feature is used for development purposes only.

Allowing Mock Locations

➔

USB settings

This feature is used for development purposes only.

• Kies (Firmware update): connects your phone to a PC and

prepares it for a direct firmware update.

If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using

this device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different

GPS locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock”

the coordinates.

• Media player: connects your phone to a PC in order to synchronize

files with Windows Media Player.

• Mass storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of

the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your

computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive. For

more information, refer to “Memory Card” on page 50.

• Ask on connection: asks for a connection type when you connect

to a computer.

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Tap Jump key shortcuts to assign shortcuts to

combinations of your Jump key ( ) and a keyboard key.

and pressing the key quickly

Theme settings

Provides quick access to the Theme Changer application that

allows you to change the current phone theme by selecting from

an array of existing themes.

For example: tapping

accesses

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

– or –

Theme settings

Tap Lock screen shortcut to assign a shortcut action when

For more information, refer to “Theme Changer” on page 156.

you drag the upper piece of the lock screen.

Jump key settings

Assigns functions to either your Keyboard or Lock screen

shortcuts.

To assign a shortcut to the lock screen:

1. Press

Jump key settings

2. Tap Lock screen shortcut

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

The Jump key settings screen displays a list of quickly accessible

and recently used functions. This list continually changes based

on your frequent use of various features and functions.

3. Select an available category from the list.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

4. From the next screen select the desired function to

shortcut. Once selected you are returned to the Jump key

settings screen with the new function inserted within the

Lock screen shortcut description.

Jump key settings

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

202

Synchronizing a Google Account

Accounts and Synchronization

Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety

of different sources or sites. These accounts can range from

Google, a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server, and other

social sites such as Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace. Corporate

and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar

events and Contacts.

By default, there are no accounts managed by the device. These

must be manually added.

To manage an existing Google account

1. Press and then tap

Accounts and sync

2. Tap Add account

3. Tap Next Sign in

➔

(Settings) ➔

➔

Google.

To enable the auto-sync feature:

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Accounts and sync

Note: If you do not already have a Google account, tap Create and follow the

– or –

on-screen prompts to create your new account.

From the Home screen, tap

Accounts & Sync).

(Applications) ➔

APPS

4. Touch the Username (@gmail.com) and Password fields

(

and enter your information.

2. Tap Auto-sync. A check mark indicates the feature is

enabled. This feature enables the synchronization of data

between your phone and external sites or servers.

5. Tap Sign in. Your phone then communicates with the

Google servers to confirm your information. Your existing

Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts

area of the screen.

•

The three main components are Contacts Email, and Calendar

Events. Before these can be synchronized, they must be added to

the managed accounts list.

•

Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then

automatically updated to your device.

• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the

background.

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To configure the Google management settings:

1. Press and then tap

Accounts and sync

2. Tap within the Google account field to reveal the

Synchronizing Your Corporate Account

➔

(Settings) ➔

By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by

the device. These must be manually added.

Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is automatically added as

a managed account.

account’s synchronization settings screen.

3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync

Use the following procedure to configure your phone to

synchronize with a corporate email account.

Contacts

indicates the feature is enabled.

4. Press to return to the previous screen.

Sync Gmail, or Sync Calendar). A check mark

APPS

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(Settings) ➔ Accounts and sync.

– or –

Press

For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts”

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

on page 93.

Accounts and sync

2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to

synchronize.

3. Tap

within the adjacent account field to reveal the

account’s synchronization settings screen.

4. Toggle the check mark adjacent to either the Sync

Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to manually sync the

account.

Changing Your Settings

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Factory Data Reset

Privacy Settings

Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to

erase all personal data.

From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to

the factory default settings.

ᮣ

Press

Privacy

Mobile Backup and Restore

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

1. Press

Privacy. (You will see a disclaimer.)

2. Touch Factory data reset Reset phone.

3. If necessary, enter your password and touch Erase

everything

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

The phone can be configured to back up your current settings,

application data and settings.

1. Press

Privacy

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

The phone resets to the factory default settings

automatically and when finished displays the Home

screen.

2. Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current

phone settings and applications.

SD Card & Phone Storage

3. Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of a

previously installed application (including preferences and

data).

From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the

memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.

For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card,

see “Using the SD Card” on page 50.

To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

SD card and phone storage.The available memory

displays under the Total space and Available space

headings.

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If messaging notification is enabled, you can choose to receive

on-screen notifications for messages such as SMS(text), MMS

(multimedia text messages), and group texting messages.

Notification Pop-up

This menu allows you to configure the parameters for on-screen

message notifications. It allows you to activate/deactivate

notifications, assign allowed notification types, block email

notifications, and set a duration time for the on-screen

notification.

To configure messaging notifications:

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Notification pop-up

To activate the pop-up function:

2. Tap the Messaging field to activate the feature. A check

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

mark appears when the feature is active.

Notification pop-up

To prevent on-screen email notifications:

2. Tap the Notification pop-up field to activate the feature.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

A check mark appears when the feature is active.

Notification pop-up

To deactivate the pop-up function:

2. Tap Email notifications and select an email account name.

3. Tap OK to store the new filter.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Notification pop-up

To set the duration for on-screen ups:

2. Tap the Notification pop-up field to deactivate the feature.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

When there is no check mark, the feature is deactivated.

Notification pop-up

2. Tap the Set duration for each notification. This assigns how

long the pop-up remains on-screen.

3. Select a duration time: 3 seconds

5 seconds, 7 seconds, or

9 seconds

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

206

LED settings

Available LED notification

colors

Allows you to configure the color being used to notify a user on a

recent activity. You can choose to have any of four colors

displayed within the Notification LED when a chosen activity is

detected.

These activities consist of:

•

New SMS and MMS

Missed Call

New Email

Power charging

Search Settings

Note: Once the battery has reached a100% charged state, the battery LED

You can use your phone's search preferences to configure some

aspects of Google Web search (for example, whether it makes

suggestions below the Quick Search Box as you type), and what

phone features you want to include in searches.

no longer turns on.

To assign an LED setting for a particular activity:

1. Press

settings

2. Tap an onscreen activity and select an available color.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ LED

1. Slide open the screen to reveal the QWERTY keyboard.

2. Press

(Search).

3. Press

and then tap Search settings

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap any of the following search parameters to then alter

Language & Keyboard Settings

the settings:

This setting allows you to configure the language in which to

display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.

• Google search opens a screen where you can set your Google

search preferences.

ᮣ

Press

Locale and text

Language Settings

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

–

Show web suggestions: includes search matches from Google’s

online search engine.

Use My Location: uses your My Location information for Google

search results and services.

To set the language that the menus display on the phone:

1. Press and then tap Settings) ➔

Locale and text Select locale

Search history: determines whether you also wish to included

personalized search history results in the list of matches.

➔

(

➔

Manage search history: helps to manage the personalized search

history associated with your current registered Google account.

2. Select a language and region from the list.

• Searchable items: opens a screen where you can choose the

search categories included in device searches. such as: Web,

Select Input Method

Apps

Contacts, Memo, Messaging, Phone, Twitter or Voice

There are two input methods available: Swype and Samsung

keypad.

• Clear shortcuts: erases the history for recently selected search

results.

1. Press

Locale and text

2. Select an input method.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Select input method

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

208

Swype Advanced settings

Swype Settings

For more information, refer to “Configuring SWYPE Settings” on

page 70.

Advanced settings provide access to Swype operation

parameters.

• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.

When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the

next word.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Swype

(Settings) ➔

Locale and text

➔

2. Tap one of the following Swype preferences to activate the

• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a

sentence.

setting:

• Show complete trace: determines whether or not to display the

complete Swype trace path on-screen.

• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.

Default language is US English.

• Word choice window: sets the amount of times the word choice

• Word prediction: uses a built-in word database to predict words

selection window displays on screen. Move the slider between

while entering text in Swype.

Never or Always and tap OK

• Audio feedback: turns off sounds generated by the Swype

application.

• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to

on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or

• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter

text using the keypad.

Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK

Swype Help settings

• Enable tip indicator: turns on an on-screen flashing indicator that

provides helpful user information.

Help settings provide access to Swype help operation

parameters.

• Swype help: displays the on-screen Swype User Manual.

• Tutorial: provides an on-screen tutorial that shows you how to input

text faster in Swype input mode.

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About

6. Tap the Auto-capitalization field to automatically capitalize

the first letter of a sentence.

Provides information about the current Swype application

version.

7. Tap Voice input to activate the Voice input feature. This is

an experimental feature that uses Google’s networked

speech recognition application.

Samsung Keypad Settings

For more information, refer to “Using the Samsung Keypad” on

page 74.

8. Tap Auto-full stop to automatically insert a full stop by

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

tapping the space bar twice.

Locale and text

➔

Samsung keypad.

9. Tap the Tutorial field to view a short tutorial on use of the

2. Tap Portrait Keypad types and select a text input method:

Samsung keyboard.

•

Qwerty Keypad

3x4 Keypad

XT9 Advanced Settings

The following XT9 Advanced settings are available when the XT9

field is selected.

3. Tap Input languages and select a language.

4. Tap XT9 to use XT9 Predictive text method. For more

information, refer to “XT9 Advanced Settings” on

page 210. F or more information, refer to “Text Input

Methods” on page 69.

1. Tap the XT9 field to select XT9 (predictive text) mode, then

tap XT9 advanced settings

2. Tap the Word completion field to enable word completion.

Your phone predicts how to complete the word typed.

5. Tap the Keypad sweeping field if you want to sweep the

keypad and change from ABC to ?123 mode. For more

information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 69.

3. Tap the Word completion point field then touch 2 letters

letters 4 letters, or the 5 letters radio button. Word

completion begins after 2 or more (depending on your

selection).

Changing Your Settings

210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects

typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible

words that reflect the characters of the keys you touched

as well as the characters of nearby keys.

11. Tap XT9 auto-substitution to add words to substitute (for

example youve becomes you’ve). A list of substitutions

displays.

12. If you do not see the substitution you want, press

then tap Add, then input the Shortcut word and

Substitution word.

and

5. Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word

prediction.

6. Tap the Auto-append field to automatically add predictions.

13. Tap Done.

7. Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace

words that you are typing. This option assists with

correcting misspelled words.

Device Keyboard Settings

For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 69.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

8. Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the

device to automatically correct mistyped words according

to normal spelling for your region.

Locale and text

➔

Device keyboard.

2. Tap the Auto-replace field to automatically replace words

that you are typing. This option assists with correcting

misspelled words.

9. Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to

re-display the word suggestion list when you select the

wrong word from the list.

3. Tap the Auto-cap field to automatically capitalize the first

letter in a new sentence.

10. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary:

4. Tap the Auto-punctuate field to automatically provide

Tap the XT9 my words field, then press

Add. Enter the new word in the Register to XT9 my words

field, then tap Done

and then tap

punctuation once the space key is presses twice.

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring Text-to-speech

Voice Input and Out Settings

Configuring Voice Input Recognition

This feature allows the phone to provide a verbal readout of

on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller

information.

This feature allows the phone to correctly recognize verbal input.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Voice input and output

➔

Voice recognition settings

Voice input and output

➔

Text-to-speech settings

2. Configure the available options to alter the settings

associated with this feature:

• Language: selects an input language and associated dialect

recognition (if available).

• Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-to-

speech feature sounds like on your device when activated.

• SafeSearch: sets the explicit image filter settings. These settings

• Driving mode: incoming calls and new notifications are

automatically ready out loud.

apply to only Google voice search results. Choose from: Off

Moderate, or Strict

• Always use my settings: accepts an override of application

settings with personal configurations for this text-to-speech settings

screen. If enabled, your device defaults to using the text-to-speech

feature.

• Block offensive words: allows you to block recognition of known

offensive words or language. (A check mark indicates the feature is

active).

• Show hints: displays hints on a search box.

• Default engine: sets the speech synthesis engine that will be used

3. Press

to return to the previous screen.

for the spoken text. Choices include: Pico TTS

• Install voice data: confirms the installation of necessary data

required for voice synthesis.

• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by

the device. Choose from: Very slow

Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very

fast.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

212

• Language: assigns the language used for verbal readout. Choose

Adjusting the Optical Joystick settings

from American English or Spanish.

1. Press

Accessibility

2. When prompted, tap Cancel

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

• Pico TTS: configures the pico TTS settings for various languages.

Accessibility Settings

This service is able to collect all the text you type, including

personal data credit card numbers except passwords. It may also

log your user interface interactions. It comes from the

applications such as KickBack, SoundBack, and TalkBack.

Note: By default, the optical joystick is enabled on the phone.

3. Tap Enable optical joystick to deactivate this function (the

check mark is removed from the adjacent field).

– or –

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Accessibility

Tap Enable optical joystick to reactivate this function.

Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility applications

from the Android Market.

2. If prompted, follow your on-screen instructions to

download accessibility apps (such as Talkback) from the

Android Market.

3. Tap Accessibility to activate the feature, then select the

services for which you want data to log.

Note: The

(Power key) ends all calls (check/uncheck).

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About Phone

Date and Time

This menu allows you to change the current time and date

displayed.

This menu contains legal information, system tutorial

information, and other phone information such as the model

number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version, and

software build number.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Date and time

To access phone information:

2. Tap Automatic to allow the network set the date and time.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

About phone. The following information displays:

Important!: Deactivate Automatic to manually set the rest of the options.

• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery

(percentage), the phone number for this device, the network

connection, signal strength, mobile network type, service state,

roaming status, mobile network state, IMEI number, IMEI SV, Wi-Fi

MAC address, Bluetooth address, and Up time.

3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the

Month Day, and Year then touch Set.

4. Tap Select time zone, then touch a time zone.

• Battery use: displays the applications or services (in percentages)

that are using battery power.

5. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and

Minute. Touch PM or AM, then tap Set

• Legal information: This option displays information about Open

source licenses as well as Google legal information. This

information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal

information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of

Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent

information as a reference.

•

Optional: Touch Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the

phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.

6. Tap Select date format and touch the date format type.

Read the information and terms, then press BACK to return to the

Settings menu.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

214

• System tutorial: provides a quick, online tutorial that walks you

through basic phone features. Read the on-screen information and

follow the system prompts.

• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.

• Firmware version: displays the firmware version loaded on this

handset.

• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this

handset.

• Kernal version: displays the kernal version loaded on this handset.

• Build number: displays the software, build number.

Note: Firmware, baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used for

updates to the handset or support. For additional information please

contact your T-Mobile service representative.

Software Update

The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to

connect to the network and upload any new phone software

directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the

latest available software when you access this option.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Software update

The phone automatically updates the software (if

available).

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 13: Health and Safety Information

This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using

your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used

in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before

The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the

microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially

reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high

levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),

exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects

causes no known adverse health effects.

using your mobile device

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published

information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)

exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the

following information:

The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be

confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic

energy.

Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in

X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization

is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal

locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage

biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause

cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific

evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.

Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over

the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies

looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy

emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported

biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have

failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have

failed to show an association between exposure to radio

frequency from a cell phone and health problems.

The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,

including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great

enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore,

RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of

non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation

(heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with

relatively low frequencies.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

216

While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can

increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two

areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly

vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood

flow in them to carry away excess heat.

Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain

cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain

cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use

of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every

day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in

brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and

errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data.

Additional information about Interphone can be found at

http://com.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/.

Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between

RF and certain health problems?

The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,

attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have

shown a connection have failed.

Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not

answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research

is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to

monitor developments in this field.

The scientific community at large therefore believes that the

weight of scientific evidence does not show an association

between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and

adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has

supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge.

Some of these studies are described below.

International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)

The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring

of a large group of people to determine if there are any health

issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy

from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow

Interphone Study

Interphone is a large international study designed to determine

whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A

report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology

(June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000

people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar

number of healthy controls.

approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to

30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be

found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RiskofBrainCancerfromExposuretoRadioFrequencyFields

in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)

Cell Phone Industry Actions

Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory

actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a

number of steps, including the following:

MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship

between exposure to radio frequency energy from

communication technologies including cell phones and brain

cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center

study involving 14 European and non-European countries.

Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at

http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/

view.php?ID=39.

•

Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for

the type of signal emitted by cell phones;

Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the

user; and

Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current

information on cell phone use and human health concerns.

Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program

of the National Cancer Institute

The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies

such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

(IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation

Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards

continue to adequately protect the public.

The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer

statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of

new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for

brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use

has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987

and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did

not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at

http://seer.cancer.gov/

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

218

Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other

Accessories

Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy

Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions

from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free

kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience

and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you

want to use your phone while driving.

If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy

(RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that

there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned

about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple

steps to minimize your RF exposure.

Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from

RF Radiation

Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions

from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories

which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce

risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF

absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing

more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies

have shown that these products generally do not work as

advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields”

may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may

be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an

increase in RF absorption.

•

Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your

head and the cell phone.

Hands-Free Kits

Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and

various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and

holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy

absorption from cell phones.

Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone

is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved

body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are

required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when

used against the head and against the body.

Children and Cell Phones

The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of

cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers.

The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to

children and teenagers as well.

•

Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the

head and the cell phone.

•

World Health Organization (WHO):

http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.

International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:

http://www.icnirp.de.

Some groups sponsored by other national governments have

advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at

all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom

made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report,

a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that

using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their

recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly

precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any

health hazard exists.

Health Protection Agency:

http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.

US Food and Drug Administration:

http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/

RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/

HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification

Information

Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is

designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for

Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.

Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various

sources can be obtained from the following organizations

(updated 10/1/2010):

•

FCC RF Safety Program:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.

These FCC exposure limits are derived from the

recommendations of two expert organizations: the National

Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and

the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

http://www.osha.gov/S L T C/radiofrequencyradiation/.

(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)

In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific

and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and

academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature

related to the biological effects of RF energy.

•

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

220

The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones

employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific

Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of

absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of

watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to

comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).

For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets

FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that

contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a

minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.

Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF

exposure guidelines.

The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of

safety to give additional protection to the public and to account

for any variations in measurements.

The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile

phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance

with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values

for this model phone as reported to the FCC are:

SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions

accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest

certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the

SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual

SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the

maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to

operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power

required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a

wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.

•

Head: 0.34 W/Kg.

Body-worn: 0.96 W/Kg.

2.4GHZ WLAN

•

Head: 0.32 W/Kg.

Body-worn: 0.54 W/Kg.

SAR information on this and other model phones can be viewed

online at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea. To find information that

pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone

FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case

of the phone.

Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it

must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed

the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model

phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear

and worn on the body) as required by the FCC.

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to

find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a

particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it

should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular

phone. Additional product specific SAR information can also be

areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in

certain areas.

Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call

go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember,

driving comes first, not the call!

obtained at www.fcc.gov/cgb/sar

If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these

tips:

Smart Practices While Driving

On the Road - Off the Phone

•

Use a hands-free device;

The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of

his or her vehicle.

Secure your phone within easy reach;

Place calls when you are not moving;

Plan calls when your car will be stationary;

Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;

Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be

performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to

passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has

assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the

secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.

Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which

may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so

absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act

of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting

responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to

understand and address distractions.

Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving

and will suspend the call if necessary;

•

Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;

Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an

automobile:

Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and

their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them.

The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

222

Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or

near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law

may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the

automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or

ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an

automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result

in fines, penalties, or other damages.

Battery Use and Safety

Important!: Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage

Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries

and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries.

•

Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt

to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of

pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-

circuit, resulting in overheating.

Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the

driver's clear view of the street and traffic.

Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.

Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even

when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally,

the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the

phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service

provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working

properly.

Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web

browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.

Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games

while operating a vehicle.

For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive

heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the

phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with

an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer,

iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high

temperatures.

Important!: Important: Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge

your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are

specifically designed for your phone.

Warning!: Warning: Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may

present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard

Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused

by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.

•

Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or

the battery may explode when overheated.

Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking

battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe

disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service

center.

•

Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some

websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable

manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even

counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase

manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If

unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,

contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.

•

Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery,

especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the

phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take

it to a service center for inspection.

Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging

devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible

risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries,

•

Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.

Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental

short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry,

clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals

of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry

a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may

damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.

damages to your phone, or other serious hazard

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

224

regarding specific locations may be found at:

http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/

Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling

Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its

customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine

Samsung accessories.

index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/

Mail It In

The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung

customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to

http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/

usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=STA_rec

yle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to print out a

free pre-paid postage label and then send your old mobile

device or battery to the address listed, via U.S. Mail, for

recycling.

Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only

important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must

be recycled or disposed of properly.

Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and

accessories may not be available in your area.

We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile

device by working with respected take-back companies in every

state in the country.

Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.

To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:

Drop It Off

You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and

batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung

Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be

found at: http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/

www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect

Or call, (877) 278-0799.

Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices

and batteries

usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp

Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with

local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in

household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect

the environment - recycle!

Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at

these locations for no fee.

Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or

batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where

mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display / Touch-Screen

Warning!: Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.

Please note the following information when using your mobile

device:

UL Certified Travel Charger

The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety

requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions

per UL guidelines:

WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY

The display on your mobile device is made of glass or

acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or

if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is

broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY

LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE

PROPERTY DAMAGE.

WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN

MOBILE DEVICE

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE

INSTRUCTIONS.

If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please

note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch

from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using

excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the

touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface

and void the warranty. For more information, please refer

to the “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 237.

DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH

AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF

THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER

OUTLET.

THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY

ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR

MOUNT POSITION.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

226

applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties

providing services.

GPS & AGPS

Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning

System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses

satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to

changes implemented in accordance with the Department of

Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).

Changes may affect the performance of location-based

technology on your mobile device.

Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls

When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may

activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the

emergency responders your approximate location.

AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area. Therefore:

•

Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your

ability; and

Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global

Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the

cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your

wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data

charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with

your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for

details.

•

Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder

instructs you.

Navigation

Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain

inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do

change over time. In some areas, complete information may not

be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that

the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see

before following them. All users should pay attention to road

conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact

Your Location

Location-based information includes information that can be

used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device.

Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network

transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use

applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving

directions), such applications transmit location-based

safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs

information. The location-based information may be shared with

third-parties, including your wireless service provider,

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may

first need to deactivate those features before you can make an

emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular

service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to

give all the necessary information as accurately as possible.

Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of

communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call

until given permission to do so.

Emergency Calls

This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates

using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as

user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection

in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should

never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential

communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before

traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate

method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember,

to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched

on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.

Care and Maintenance

Your mobile device is a product of superior design and

craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions

below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you

to enjoy this product for many years:

Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile

device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile

device features are in use. Check with local service providers.

Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:

Liquids of any kind

To make an emergency call:

1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.

Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids

contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the

mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the

use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage

the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not

use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an

electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device.

2. From the Home screen, tap

. Enter the emergency

number for your present location (for example, 911 or

other official emergency number), then tap

Emergency numbers vary by location.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

228

Extreme heat or cold

Responsible Listening

Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.

Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss

Microwaves

Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud

sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is

played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to

loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of

preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that

using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and

cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead

to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use

of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or

other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also

been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the

ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual

susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing

problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a

portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the

sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As

a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for

everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and

equipment.

Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.

Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.

Dust and dirt

Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.

Cleaning solutions

Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong

detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth

slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.

Shock or vibration

Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough

handling can break internal circuit boards.

Paint

Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s

moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper

operation.

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You should follow some common sense recommendations when

using any portable audio device:

any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio

device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.

•

Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an

audio source.

You can obtain additional information on this subject from the

following sources:

Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at

which you can hear adequately.

American Academy of Audiology

11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300

Reston, VA 20190

Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not

realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.

When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the

people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear

what you are listening to.

Voice: (800) 222-2336

Email: [email protected]

•

Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you

choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use

noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental

noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling

headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than

when using earbuds.

Internet: http://www.audiology.org/Pages/default.aspx

National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders

National Institutes of Health

31 Center Drive, MSC 2320

Bethesda, MD 20892-2320

•

Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time

is required before you hearing could be affected.

Email: [email protected]

Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such

as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary

hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.

Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/

•

Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you

experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

230

Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)

395 E Street, S.W.

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio

Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment

may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless

mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.

Suite 9200

Patriots Plaza Building

Implantable Medical Devices

Washington, DC 20201

Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)

1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)

Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328

Email: [email protected]

A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained

between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable

medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter

defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.

Persons who have such devices:

Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html

1-888-232-6348 TTY

•

Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from

their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;

•

Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;

Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to

minimize the potential for interference;

Operating Environment

Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area,

and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is

forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger.

When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another

device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do

not connect incompatible products.

•

Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason

to suspect that interference is taking place;

Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your

implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using

your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device,

consult your health care provider.

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Potentially Explosive Environments

For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-

faqs.html#

Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially

explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks

in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily

injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile

device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are

reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio

equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),

chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress.

Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not

always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,

chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied

petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air

contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal

powders, and any other area where you would normally be

advised to turn off your vehicle engine.

Other Medical Devices

If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the

manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately

shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to

assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile

device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in

these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care

facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to

external RF energy.

Vehicles

RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately

shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the

manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before

using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also

consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added

to your vehicle.

Posted Facilities

Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices

require you to do so.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

232

use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile

device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for

your personal needs.

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)

Regulations for Wireless Devices

On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309 modified the

exception of wireless mobile devices under the Hearing Aid

Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require digital wireless

mobile devices be compatible with hearing aids.

M-Ratings: Mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC

requirements and are likely to generate less interference to

hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is

the better/higher of the two ratings.

T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements

and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices

than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher

of the two ratings.

The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to

telecommunications services for persons with hearing

disabilities. While some wireless mobile devices are used near

some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants),

users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some

hearing devices are more immune than others to this

interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of

interference they generate.

Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device

manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find

this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is

relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and

wireless mobile device rating values are then added together.

The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system

for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find

mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing

devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices

that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on

the box.

A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6

is considered for best use. If a hearing aid meets the M2 level

rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating,

the sum of the two values equal M5. This is synonymous for T

ratings. This should provide the hearing aid user with “normal

usage” while using their hearing aid with the particular wireless

mobile device.

The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on

the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device

happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

“Normal usage” in this context is defined as a signal quality that

is acceptable for normal operation. The M mark is intended to be

synonymous with the U mark. The T mark is intended to be

synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T marks are

recommended by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industries

Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section

20.19 of the FCC Rules.

The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.

Restricting Children's Access to Your

Mobile Device

Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with

it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the

mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device

bill.

HAC/Wi-Fi for Newer Technologies

This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids

for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there

may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone

that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is

important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly

and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear

implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult

your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for

information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions

about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider

or phone retailer.

Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of

the reach of small children.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

234

FCC Notice and Cautions

FCC Notice

Other Important Safety Information

Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the

mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be

dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.

•

The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in

close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you

to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be

eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as

propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection

Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the

National Fire Protection Association.

•

Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your

vehicle are securely mounted.

Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your

vehicle is mounted and operating properly.

Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials

in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or

accessories.

Cautions

Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly

approved in this document could void your warranty for this

equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.

Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of

any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the

mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a

defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite

sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.

Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.

•

For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag

inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or

portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in

the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly

installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.

•

Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of

wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to

the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before

using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.

Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or

denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly,

take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there

will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.

Dispose of phones in accordance with local regulations. In some areas,

the disposal of phones in household or business trash may be

prohibited. For safe disposal options for phones, contact your nearest

Samsung authorized service center.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

236

Section 14: Warranty Information

Standard Limited Warranty

dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG; (c) defects or

damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when

pressing on a touch screen; (d) equipment that has the serial number or

the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or

made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear; (f) defects or damage

resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with

accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or

approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper

testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not

furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects or damage resulting

from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt,

windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,

blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (i) defects or

damage resulting from cellular signal reception or transmission, or

viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or (j)

Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited

Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of

rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not

cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger

not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any

of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or

(iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG

phone for which it is specified.

What is Covered and For How Long?

SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC ("SAMSUNG")

warrants that SAMSUNG's handsets and accessories

("Products") are free from defects in material and workmanship

under normal use and service for the period commencing upon

the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and

continuing for the following specified period of time after that

date:

Phone

1 Year

90 Days

1 Year

Batteries

Case/Pouch/Holster

Other Phone Accessories

What is Not Covered?

This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product.

This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting

from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper

storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or

unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches,

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What are SAMSUNG's Obligations?

SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this

Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor

charges for the repair or return of such Product.

During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is

returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty,

SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNG'S sole

option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole

option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components

when repairing any Product, or may replace the Product with a

rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases,

pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90)

days. All other repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for

a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty

on the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is

longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and

equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to

any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or

assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.

You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the

Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty

service.

What Are The Limits On SAMSUNG’s liability?

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG'S

RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE

PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT

LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS

LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR

DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR

FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF

USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR

SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR

PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR

INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS

DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY

LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND

DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

What must you do to obtain warranty service?

To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return

the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate

container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or

comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase,

the serial number of the Product and the seller's name and

address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product,

please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If

Warranty Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

238

SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY,

CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY

THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH

THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR

EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY

SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT

DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE

QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY

OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY

WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF

SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT.

What is the procedure for resolving disputes?

ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS

LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR

PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED

EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND

NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be

combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other

person's or entity's Product or claim, and specifically, without

limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances

proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be

conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not

exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable

law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the

American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration

Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision

is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of

the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws

principles, shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty

and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The

arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application

of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty.

Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to

create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products. No

agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is authorized to

modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding

representations or claims, whether in advertising, presentations or

otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited

Warranty.

This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also

have other rights that vary from state to state.

For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive

of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less

("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your

reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part

239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees,

expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim

was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be

required to pay no more than half of the total administrative,

facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is

less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.

Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in

which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and

expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be

determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the

arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among

the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and

costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any

court of competent jurisdiction.

number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if

you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on

the Product box; (ii) on the Product information screen, which can

be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of the

Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on

the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).

Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later

than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer

purchaser's purchase of the Product and providing the same

information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be

effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out

of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of

the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the

benefits of the Limited Warranty.

This arbitration provision also applies to claims against

SAMSUNG'S employees, representatives and affiliates if any

such claim arises from the Product's sale, condition or

performance.

Severability

If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or

unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not

affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty.

You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing

notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of

the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the Product. To opt out,

you must send notice by e-mail to [email protected], with

the subject line: "Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt

out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the

Product was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model

Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC

1301 E. Lookout Drive

Richardson, Texas 75082

Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG

Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)

Warranty Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

240

No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written

approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without

notice. [060111]

the Software available over a network where it could be used by

multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of

the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes

only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or

other proprietary notices contained on the original.

End User License Agreement for Software

IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement

("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual

or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software

owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated

companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that

accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and

may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or

electronic documentation ("Software"). BY CLICKING THE "I

ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE

THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD,

ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO

BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT

ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE

"DECLINE" BUTTON, AND DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.

2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves

all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software

is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and

treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and

other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is

licensed, not sold.

3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse

engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to

discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except

and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by

applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or

disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works

based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense

or provide commercial hosting services with the Software.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights

provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this

EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of

the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage

media of one computer and use the Software on a single

computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make

4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its

affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as

part of the product support services related to the Software

provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may

use this information solely to improve its products or to provide

241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose

this information in a form that personally identifies you.

apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration

Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination

restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.

5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and

add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may

provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain

your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms

along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an

upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by

Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may

no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your

upgrade eligibility.

8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your

rights under this License will terminate automatically without

notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms

and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you

must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or

partial, of the Software.

9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party applications

may be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device.

SAMSUNG makes no representations whatsoever about any of

these applications. Since SAMSUNG has no control over such

applications, Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that

6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the

rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it

is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the

Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include

all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and

printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not

retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an

indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the

end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA

terms.

SAMSUNG is not responsible for the availability of such

applications and is not responsible or liable for any content,

advertising, products, services, or other materials on or available

from such applications. Purchaser expressly acknowledges and

agrees that use of third-party applications is at Purchaser's sole

risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality,

performance, accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to

Purchaser to take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser

selects to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan

horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on

this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of

7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is

subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to

comply with all applicable international and national laws that

Warranty Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

242

any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to

Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,

sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third-

party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees that

SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly,

for any damage or loss caused or alleged to caused by, or in

connection with, use of or reliance on any such third-party

content, products, or services available on or through any such

application. Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that your use

of any third-party application is governed by such third-party

application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy

Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or

personal data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to

such third-party application provider, will be subject to such

third-party application provider's privacy policy, if such a policy

exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY

DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF

ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.

PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR

OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION

IS DONE AT PURCHASER'S OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND

PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO

YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM

THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY

APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY

WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER PURCHASER'S PERSONAL

INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION

PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL

INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION

PROVIDER. ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH

THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS

AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM

SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST

EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG

DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR

STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR

WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES,

QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY

RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT

WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF

THE THRID-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS

10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party Applications.

SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY

REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,

TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF,

OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING,

THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER

SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE

243

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET

PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE

THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR

ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY

APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES THE

ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR

CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW

EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED

WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,

WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY PURCHASER FROM

SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF

WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO

CREATE ANY WARRANTY.

JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION

OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE

LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG'S TOTAL

LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES

OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON

CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF

PURCHASER'S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS

MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA,

SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID

SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION THAT

WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING

LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING

SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM

EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY

FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO

THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY THIRD-PARTY

APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO

ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN

OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO

CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT,

INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed

only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"

consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software

documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other

end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of

TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA

shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the

International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME

Warranty Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

244

excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably

settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in

accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial

Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and

binding upon the parties.

Important!: Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to

Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service

at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges

may apply.

Customer Care Center:

14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire

agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software

and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written

communications, proposals and representations with respect to

the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If

any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,

unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full

force and effect.

1000 Klein Rd.

Plano, TX 75074

Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)

Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:

1301 East Lookout Drive

Richardson, Texas 75082

Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)

Precautions for Transfer and Disposal

Important!: If you are using a handset other than a standard numeric keypad,

If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the

standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a

superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve

and reuse the data by means of special software.

dial the numbers listed in brackets.

Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)

2011 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights

reserved.

To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this

sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s

Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear

which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to

default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care

Center for details.

No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written

approval. Specifications and availability subject to change

without notice.

245

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Playing onto Another Device 135

Receiving Media 135

Transmitting Media 135

Amazon MP3 136

Answering a call 54

Answering Call 188

Application Cache and Data

clearing 146

Application Menus

Navigating through 36

Application Shortcuts

Rearranging 46

Files 40

Gallery 40

Numerics

2G (EDGE) Network 187

2G Network

Using 187

3G Network 187

Using 187

4G 174

4G Network 187

Using 187

Google Books 38, 136

Google Mail 40, 140

Google Maps 41, 142

Google Search 40

Group Texting 40

Highlight 40

Latitude 40

Media Hub 41

Media Room 41

Memo 41, 147

Messaging 41, 148

My Device 42

Accessibility 213

Accessing

Applications 37

Amazon MP3 38

Recently-used applications 37

Voice mail 18

Accounts and syncronization 133

Add 2 sec Pause 56

Adjusting

Call Volume 61

Adobe PDF 156

Alarm

setting an 178

AllShare

Android Market 41, 144

Navigation 42

Places 42

AppPack 38

Browser 44, 160

Calculator 39, 137

Calendar 39

Setup Wizard 42

Task Manager 43

TeleNav GPS 43, 156

Theme Changer 43

T-Mobile Mall 42

T-Mobile TV 42

Twitter 43

Camera 39, 139

DriveSmart 39

Email 39, 140

Facebook 39

Configuring Settings 134

246

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Universal Composer 44

Using the Camcorder 123

Using the Camera 116

Visual Voicemail 44

Voice Search 44, 159

Web 44

wall charger 11

Battery Cover

Settings 167, 183

status indicators 167

Switching to Headset During Call 62

Turning on and off 167

Bluetooth Settings 183

Browser

Removal 7, 78

Replace 8

Battery Life

Extending 13

YouTube 44, 160

Applications and Development 133

Ask On Connection 51

Auto Redial 189

Auto Reject 188

Auto-Reply 106

Auto-sync

Battery Use & Safety 223

Bing

Set Search Engine 166

Block List 67, 106

Bluetooth

adding bookmarks 164

deleting bookmarks 164

emptying cookies 164

Entering a URL 162

Navigation 162

Options 162

Search Engine 166

Settings 165

About 166

Activating Device Name 183

Activating Visibility 183

Change Name 167

Deleting a Paired Device 169

Disable 167

Disconnecting a Paired Device 169

Enable 139, 167

Paring Devices 168

Scan for Devices 168

Scanning for Devices 183

Sending Contact Information 169

Sending Contacts Via 169

Set Visibility 168

Enabling 203

Bubble

Options 104

Back Up

My Data 205

Backup and Restore 205

Battery

Charging 11

Extending Life 13

Installing 10

Low Battery Indicator 12

Removal 10

Saving Power 14

Calculator

137

Scientific Functions 137

Calendar 177

Creating an Event 177

Manually Sync Events 138

Settings 177

Call Barring 189

247

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Call Forwarding 189

Call Functions 53

Answering 54

Muting 62

Camcorder 123

Camcorder Options 124

Options 119

Contact Information

Joining 89

Contact List

Ending a 53

Options 87

Ending a Call 53

Making a Multi-Party Call 63

Pause Dialing 56

Redialing the last number 57

Wait dialing 56

Call Logs 65

Settings 120

Camera 116

Camera Options 117

Options 117

Taking Pictures 116

Care and Maintenance 228

Charging battery 11

Children and Cell Phones 219

Clearing

Application Cache and Data 146

Connections

Accessing the Internet 161

Contact

Contact Menu

Options 88

Contacts

Adding a Number to Existing 87

Adding Your Facebook Friends 95

Additional Options 96

Blocking/Unblocking 103

Default Storage Location 97

Deleting 87

Display Options 94

Displaying Contacts by Name 94

Export List to microSD 171

Filtering 94

Accessing 65

Accessing from Notifications 66

Altering Numbers 67

Erasing 68

Call Settings 188

General 188

Voice Calls 189

Call Volume

Adjusting 61

Copying to microSD Card 93

Copying to SIM Card 92

Creating a New 83

New From Keypad 84

Contact Entry

First Name First 94

Groups 97

Last Name First 94

Sending 91

Call Waiting 64, 189

Calling

Using Wi-Fi 58

Sending All 91

Calls

Making a 53

Options 89

Contact Image

Setting Default Location 88

Settings 97

Multi-party 63

Set as 122

Contacts List 53

248

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Context Menu 86, 88, 89

Context Menus

Navigation 37

Dialing

With a SIM 15

Without a SIM 15

Display

Refreshing Messages 109

Sending 96

Emergency Calls 228

Emoticons 80

Using 37

Icons 24

Ending a call 53

Emptying 164

Settings 24

Entering Text 69

Copying Contact 92

Corporate Email

Account Syncronization 204

Add Account 204

Creating a Playlist 128

Creating and Sending

Messages 100

Status Bar 24

Display / Touch-Screen 226

Displaying

Your Phone Number 53

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

216

Using SWYPE 70

Erasing files from

Memory card 52

Exchange Email 110

Account Setup 111

Composing 112

Configuring Settings 113

Deleting Message 112

Opening 112

Downloading

Customizing

Home screens 45

New Application 145

Drive Smart 191

DriveSmart

Refreshing Messages 112

Exposure to RF Signals 216

Handsfree 139

Data Roaming 186

Deleting

Message 104

Email 108

Facebook

Multiple Messages 104

Deleting a contact 87

Device Keyboard

Settings 211

Composing 109

Configuring Settings 110

Creating an Account 108

Internet Email 108

Opening 109

Qik 158

Factory Data Reset 52, 205

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)

Regulations for Wireless Devices 233

FCC Notice and Cautions 235

Fixed Dialing Numbers 189

Opening Internet Email 109

249

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Folder

Creating and Managing 48

Deleting 49

Gmail 114, 140

Editing 98

Composing 114

Removing an Entry 98

Group Settings

Editing a Caller Group 98

Group Texting 141

GSM 186

Opening 114

Refreshing 114

Signing In 114

Viewing a Message 115

Google

Account Management Settings 204

Account Syncronization 203

Add Account 203

Renaming 48

Font

Style 194

Font Size

Caption 160

HAC Mode 191

Handsfree 139

HD Camcorder

Gallery

Adding a Sync Account 203

Create New Account 16

Retrieving Password 17

Set Search Engine 166

Signing into Your Account 17

Google Books 136

Google Maps

Enabling a Location Source 143

Opening a Map 143

Google Talk 42, 155

GPS & AGPS 227

Folder Options 121

Image Options 121

Opening 126

GeoTagging

Insert 101

Get Friends 94

Getting Started 6

Battery 10

Battery Cover 7

Locking/Unlocking the Phone 15

microSD card 9

Accessing the Video Folder 124

Shooting Video 123

Health and Safety Information 216

Highlight 40, 141

Settings 141

History tab 99

Hold

Placing a Call on Hold 61

Home 30

Home Key 28

Home Screen

Overview 30

Home Screen Wallpaper 194

Set as 122

Setting 120

Group

SIM Card 8

Switching Phone On/Off 15

Voice Mail 17

Adding an Member to an Existing

Group 97

Creating a New Caller Group 97

250

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Home screens

Customizing 45

HSPA+ 174

Internet 161

Search 162

Internet Email 108

Uninstalling Third-party Applications

200

Market 144

Troubleshooting a Connection 145

Marking a Contact

As Default 91

Media Hub 129

Creating a New Account 130

Using 130

Icons

Joining

Description 24

indicator 24

Status 24

Images

Contact Information 89

Jump Key 28

Settings 202

Media hub 129

Assigning as a Contact icon 122

Assigning as Wallpaper 123

Transferring 171

Verifying 171

Importing and Exporting

To SIM card 97

Kies Mini 170

Media Room 126, 147

Playing Music 126

Playing Videos 126

Media Volume

Setting 192

Memo

Before Using 171

LED

Notifications 207

Lock Screen 15

Assigning a Shortcut 202

Viewing Missed Calls 68

Lock Screen Wallpaper 194

Low battery indicator 12

in call

options 61

Options 147

Memory card

in call options 62

Incoming Call Volume

Setting 192

Indicator icons 24

indicator icons 24

International Calls 56

Making 56

Erasing files from the 52

Menu Navigation

Selecting with Fingers 35

Using the Optical Joystick 35

Merge 63

Making

International Calls 56

Making a call 53

Managing Applications 199

Clearing Application Cache 199

251

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Message

Blocking 103

Reply 103

threads 103

Message Options 101

Message Search 104

Message Thread

Options 103

Message threads 103

Messages

Creating and Sending 100

Icons on Status Bar 100

Viewing New 102

Messaging

Auto-Reply Settings 106

Block List 106

Types of Messages 100

microSD Card

Insertion 9

Mounting the SD card 51

Multi-Party Call 63

Dropping One Participant 64

Private Conversation 63

Multi-party call

Setting up 63

Multi-party calls 63

Music Player

Adding Music 128

Creating a Playlist 128

Editing a Playlist 128

Removing Music 128

My Profile 96

Removal 10

Microsoft Exchange 83, 108

Mini Diary

Deleting an Entry 148

Settings 148

Missed Call

Viewing from Lock Screen 68

Mobile AP 174, 184

Activating 175

Connecting 175

Securing 176

My Social Network Status 194

Mobile Networks 186

Access Point Names 186

Data Roaming 186

Mobile NetworksUse Packet Data 186

Mobile Web 161

Entering Text in the Mobile Web

Browser 162

Navigating with the Mobile Web 162

Using Bookmarks 163

Namecard

Send Via 91

Sending 91

Sending All 91

Navigating

Application Menus 36

Sub-Menus 36

Through Screens 33

Network Connection

Adding a new 173

Creating and Sending Text

Messages 100

Deleting a message 104

Google Mail 114

Notifications 206

Options 101

Settings 105

Signing into Google Mail 114

252

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Mode 186

2G Network 187

3G Network 187

New Applications

Downloading 145

Notification bar 27

using the 27

Notification LED

Assigning Color 207

Notification Pop-up 206

Activate 206

Other Important Safety Information 235

Outlook 108

Synchronizing 204

Overview

Power Control 14

Predictive Text

Using XT9 77

Prefix Dialing 55

Adding Prefix 55

Deleting 55

Primary Shortcuts 32

Adding and Removing 46

Private Conversation 63

Qik 158

Recording Video 159

Settings 158

Quick Phrase 101

QWERTY

Keyboard 12, 69

Qwerty Keyboard

Settings 211

Home Screen 30

Pause Dialing 56

People

Qik 158

Phone

Icons 24

Switching On/Off 15

Phone Number

Finding 53

Phone Options 192

Phone Ringtone 193

Set as 127

Deactivate 206

Messaging Notification 206

Notification Volume

Setting 192

On/off Switch 15

Operating Environment 231

Optical Joystick

Adjusting Settings 213

Disable 213

Photos

Options 120

Setting As 120

Sharing 120

Pico TTS 212

Portable Hotspot

see Mobile AP 174

Rearranging

Application Shortcuts 46

Screens 46

Recent Applications Key 28

Recently-used Applications

Accessing 37

Enable 213

Organizer

Calculator 137

World Clock 179

253

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Redialing the last number 57

Reducing Exposure

Hands-Free Kits and Other

Accessories 219

cling 225

Setting an alarm 178

Setting up

Voicemail 17

Save a Number

From Keypad 84

Screen

Settings 181

Reject Call

Home 30

Browser 165

With Message 189

Reject List 67

Reset 205

Navigation 33

Screen Lock 196

Changing 196

Contact list 97

Display 24

Enabling Wireless Network

Responsible Listening 229

Restore 205

Restricting Children's Access to Your

Mobile device 234

Ringtone

Screen Rotation

Auto-Rotate 194

Screen Timeout 194

Screens

Adding and Deleting 45

Customizing 45

Rearranging 46

SD card

Mounting the 51

Unmounting 51

Search Engine 166

Secret Message 102

Select Locale 208

Send Namecard Via 91

Sending a Namecard 91

Locations 195

Messaging 105

Mini Diary 148

Setup Wizard 154

Shortcuts

Adding from Application Screen 47

Adding from Home Screen 47

Deleting from a Screen 47

Managing 46

Primary 32

SIM Card

Changing Exisitng PIN 197

Insertion 8

Lock 197

Phone 193

Samsung Keypad 74

ABC Mode 75

Changing the Input Type 75

Enabling 74

Entering Symbols 76

Settings 210

SYM Mode 76

XT9 Advanced Settings 210

Samsung Mobile Products and Recy-

Removal 9

SIM Card Lock

Setting Up 197

254

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Slacker Radio 127

Smart Practices While Driving 222

SNS 95

Social Network Contacts

Resync 95

Song

Set as 127

Speakerphone

Turning On and Off 62

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) 220

Speed Dial

Changing an Entry 58

Making a Call 58

Removing an Entry 58

Setting up Entries 57

Split 64

Standard Limited Warranty 237

Status Bar 24

Sticky Messages

Clear 102

Switching to Bluetooth Headset 62

SWYPE

123ABC Mode 73

Entering Text Using 70

Example 73

Text Input

Methods 69

Text Input Method

Selecting 69

Text-to-speech

Configuration 212

Theme

Settings 202

Theme Settings 202

Themes 154

Third-Party Applications 200

Uninstalling 146

Time Management

Calendar 177

T-Mobile Contacts Backup 83

T-Mobile Mall 154

Tools

Swype

Advanced Settings 70, 209

Configuring Settings 70

Entering Text 73

Help 209

Settings 209

Tutorial 209

Swype Keyboard

Using 70

System Volume

Setting 192

Camera 116

Talkback 213

Tehering

Transferring Music Files 129

TTY Mode 191

Tutorials 43, 157

Twitter

Help 184

Sub-Menus

Navigation 36

Tethering 184

Activating 184

Active Icon 184

Disconnecting 184

Qik 158

255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USB Debugging 201

USB Settings

Visual 44

UL Certified Travel Charger 226

Understanding Your Phone 20

Features 20

Front View 21

Understanding your Phone

Back View 23

Display 24

Home 30

Uninstalling

Third-Party Applications 146

Universal Composer

Creating and Sending Messages

100

Send All Contacts 92

Settings 105

Voice Actions 30

Voice Input Recognition 212

Voice mail

Accessing 18

Accessing from Another Phone 18

Setting Up 17

Voicemail 191

Volume Settings

Adjusting 192

VPN

As Mass Storage Device 172

Mass Storage Device 172

Windows Meida Player 171

USB Tethering 184

Drivers 170

Use GPS Satellites 195

Use Packet Data 186

Use Sensor Aiding 195

Use Wireless Networks 195

Using Favorites

Adding 185

Settings 184

Adding Favorites 164

Deleting a Favorite 164

Editing Favorites 164

Wait 57

Wait dialing 56

Wallpapers

Unmounting

Vibrate 192

SD card 51

Vibration

Changing 49

Updates tab 99

USB

Settings 51

USB Connection

As Mass Storage Device 172

Turn Off 51

Intensity 193

Setup 192

Video Chat 158

Settings 158

Video Player 120

Videos

Managing 49

Warranty Information 237

WCDMA 186

Web 161

Frequent 165

History 165

Options 120

256

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Web Applications

Enable Downloading 170

Widgets

World Clock

DST Settings 179

WPA2 PSK 176

Adding and Removing 47

Composer 41

Google Talk 42

Yahoo! 166

YouTube

Moving to a Different Screen 48

My Account 41

High Qulaity 132

Qik 158

Settings 42, 154

Stopwatch 180

Wi-Fi 181

About 172

Activating 59, 172, 181

Advanced Settings 174

Calling 58

Connecting to 173

Deactivating 174

Manually Adding Wi-Fi 182

Manually Scan for Network 174

Network Notifications 182

Settings 181

Status Icons 174

Windows Media Player

Synchronizing with 171

257

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Radio Shack Car Video System PLVWR84IR User Guide
RCA CRT Television J20F635 User Guide
Regency Indoor Fireplace I2400 User Guide
Remington Power Tools Chainsaw Electric Chain Saw User Guide
Riccar Vacuum Cleaner OC1 User Guide
Roberts Gorden Gas Heater Linear Heater User Guide
Samson Stereo Amplifier Servo 120 User Guide
Samsung Grill Accessory SGH M600 User Guide
Sears Lawn Mower 50225502 User Guide
Sennheiser Headphones HD 25 13 User Guide